ZCL

Operator’s
Manual,

ZCL Operator’s Manual,
Volume 1
© 2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

Part No. 161333

October 2003

© 2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation
Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com

Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat,
CDDM, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot,
Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TrackPlanner,
DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme,
DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube,
EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design,
Landmark logo and Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep,
Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF,
QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom,
Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company,
Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisXchange, Sierra,
Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace, TeamView, TERAS,
Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP,
VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement,
VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus
are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Contents

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1
Introduction
Purpose and Contents of This Guide ..............................................................

1

Typographic Conventions ................................................................................

2

Related Documentation ....................................................................................

2

Using ZCL
Overview .............................................................................................................

3

ZCL Basics .........................................................................................................

4

Understanding the Process Statement ...........................................................

5

Process Identifier .........................................................................................

5

Parameters ....................................................................................................

6

End Process Symbol ...................................................................................

7

Setting Up a ZCL Command Stream ................................................................

8

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File ..............................................

11

Running ZCL in the Foreground .................................................................

11

Running ZCL in the Background ................................................................

13

Debugging a Command File ........................................................................

14

Common Errors Found by ZCL ...................................................................

16

Additional Information ......................................................................................

17

Conversion from Inches to Centimeters ....................................................

17

Using the DATA BLOCK Process ...............................................................

18

Using the LOOP Process .............................................................................

20

R2003.12.0

Contents

iii

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Default Output File Name Creation .............................................................

20

Using Color Tables ......................................................................................

21

Arrays ............................................................................................................

21

Process Descriptions
Presentation of Information ..............................................................................

37

Parts of a Process Description ...................................................................

37

Additional Information ......................................................................................

40

Arc to Polygon ..............................................................................................
(ATOP)

41

Back Interpolate ...........................................................................................
(BK IN)

43

Basemap Detail ............................................................................................
(MAKE BDF)

45

Blank Data .....................................................................................................
(DA BK)

47

Blank Grid .....................................................................................................
(GR BK)

49

Border ...........................................................................................................
(BRDR)

51

Border Fill .....................................................................................................
(BDR FILL)

52

Branch ...........................................................................................................
(IF)

53

C or ! ..............................................................................................................
()

55

CGM File ........................................................................................................
(SCALE PLOT)

56

R2003.12.0

Contents

iv

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Colorbar ........................................................................................................
(COLORSCALE)

58

Color Polygons .............................................................................................
(COLOR POLY)

64

Color Table ...................................................................................................
(CLR TBL)

65

Compute Cell Value .....................................................................................
(CELL CALCULATE)

66

Contour .........................................................................................................
(CNTR)

68

Contour Cell Table .......................................................................................
(CNTR CELL TABLE)

74

Contour Gridding .........................................................................................
(CTOG)

78

Contour New .................................................................................................
(PROFILE CONTOUR)

85

Copy Picture .................................................................................................
(COPY)

96

Cross Section ...............................................................................................
(XSEC)

98

Cross Section New ....................................................................................... 102
(XSEC NEW)
D ..................................................................................................................... 105
()
Data Block ..................................................................................................... 106
(DATA)
Data Block Load ........................................................................................... 109
(LOAD DBLK)
Data Block Print ........................................................................................... 111
(DB PRINT)

R2003.12.0

Contents

v

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Data Block Utility .......................................................................................... 112
(CHANGE DATA BLOCK)
Data Enumeration ........................................................................................ 116
(COUNT DATA)
Data Statistics .............................................................................................. 117
(DATA STATS)
Delete File ..................................................................................................... 120
(DEL F)
Delete Picture ............................................................................................... 121
(PC DL)
Dev Well Post ............................................................................................... 122
(D WEL POST)
Dip Symbolization ........................................................................................ 132
(DIP SYMBOL)
Dip Vector Plot ............................................................................................. 134
(GRAD VECTOR PLOT)
Display .......................................................................................................... 138
(DISP)
DMS To From DEG ....................................................................................... 140
(DMS DEG)
Dual Data Ops ............................................................................................... 142
(DATA DATA TO DATA)
Dual Grid Ops ............................................................................................... 145
(GRID GRID TO GRID)
E ..................................................................................................................... 149
()
Echo .............................................................................................................. 150
()
Equity Report ................................................................................................ 151
(EQUITY)

R2003.12.0

Contents

vi

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Evaluate ........................................................................................................ 155
(EVAL)
Export ............................................................................................................ 157
(EXPT)
Export CPS File ............................................................................................ 159
(CPS EXPORT)
Export ZGF File ............................................................................................ 161
(ZGF EXPORT)
Fault Balancer .............................................................................................. 162
(BIFURCATE BALANCE)
Fault Locator ................................................................................................ 164
(FLOC)
Fault Locator New ........................................................................................ 166
(FLOC NEW)
Fault Migration ............................................................................................. 171
(FAULT MIGR)
Fault Profiling ............................................................................................... 174
(FAULT PROF)
Fault Shrinker ............................................................................................... 176
(SHRINK)
Fault Transform ............................................................................................ 181
(TRANSFORM FAULTS)
File Conversion ............................................................................................ 183
(CONVERT DATA)
File History .................................................................................................... 187
(HIST)
File Info ......................................................................................................... 188
()
File Listing .................................................................................................... 189
(LIST FILE)

R2003.12.0

Contents

vii

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

File Statistics ................................................................................................ 191
(FILE STATS)
File Utility ...................................................................................................... 194
(FILE UTIL)
Flexing ........................................................................................................... 197
(FILTER)
Flt Dip Symb Center ..................................................................................... 200
(FLT D SYMB C)
Geographic Connct ...................................................................................... 202
(CONNCT GEOGRAPHIC)
Geographic Sort ........................................................................................... 210
(SORT GEOGRAPHIC)
Graphics File ................................................................................................ 212
(OPEN ZGF)
Grid Listing ................................................................................................... 213
(LIST GRID)
Grid Resampling .......................................................................................... 216
(RESAMPLE GRID)
Grid Statistics ............................................................................................... 218
(GRID STATS)
Grid To Data .................................................................................................. 221
(G TO D)
Hand Contour Pnts ...................................................................................... 222
(SEIS SPECIAL PTS)
Hardcopy ....................................................................................................... 224
(H CPY)
Horizon Penetrate ........................................................................................ 226
(PENTRATE HORIZON)
Import ............................................................................................................ 229
(IMPT)

R2003.12.0

Contents

viii

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Import CPS File ............................................................................................ 230
(CPS IMPORT)
Import ZGF File ............................................................................................. 233
(ZGF IMPORT)
Isometric Picture .......................................................................................... 234
(FISHNET PICTURE)
Isometric Plot ............................................................................................... 235
(FISHNET PLOT)
Label Lat/Long .............................................................................................. 240
(LAB L)
Label N/E ....................................................................................................... 244
(LAB N)
Label XSEC ................................................................................................... 248
(LAB X)
Lattice To Cell ............................................................................................... 250
(CONVERT LAT TO CELL)
LGB Defaults ................................................................................................ 251
(LGBDEF)
Line Generalize ............................................................................................. 253
(LINE GEN)
Line Gridding ................................................................................................ 255
(L GRD)
Line Gridding Plus ....................................................................................... 261
(LGDP)
Line Names ................................................................................................... 270
(L NAMES)
Line Resampling .......................................................................................... 273
(RESAMPLE LINE)
List CPS Files ............................................................................................... 289
(CPS FILE LIST)

R2003.12.0

Contents

ix

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Loop .............................................................................................................. 290
()
Loop End ....................................................................................................... 292
(L END)
Macro End ..................................................................................................... 293
()
Make MFD ..................................................................................................... 294
(MAKE)
Merge ............................................................................................................. 295
(MERG)
MFDS ............................................................................................................. 298
()
Mistie Reduction .......................................................................................... 300
(MISTIE)
Multiple Grid Ops ......................................................................................... 302
(MULT GRID OPS)

Index ....................................................................................................................

R2003.12.0

Contents

305

x

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Introduction

Purpose and Contents of This Guide
This guide introduces you to ZCL, shows you how to start the program,
and how to use process statements to write a command stream for
generating a variety of maps. This guide covers all parameters for the
processes available in ZCL, and includes several appendixes with
information about structuring the command stream.
If you are a new user, read “Using ZCL” on page 3. Once you are
familiar with the structure of a process statement and a command
stream, use “Process Descriptions” on page 37 to write your command
stream. The “Process Descriptions” section describes each process and
its parameters.
This guide contains the following sections:

R2003.12.0

“Introduction” on page 1 explains the purpose of this guide, who
should read it, what is contained in it, what some of the
conventions used are, and how to find more information.

“Using ZCL” on page 3 explains what ZCL is, the parts and
structure of a process statement, setting up a ZCL run, debugging a
run, and some additional information.

“Process Descriptions” on page 37 explains how to find
information in this section, and includes complete information
about each process and its parameters.

Purpose and Contents of This Guide

1

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Typographic Conventions
To make the information in this guide as accessible as possible, the
following conventions are observed throughout:

Examples of process descriptions in a command stream, and the
presentation of the parts of a Data Block, are in a typewriter-style
font, such as:
ECHO: /

A portion of an example or Data Block that is to be replaced by a
user value is presented in italic typewriter-style font, such as:
SINGLE DATA OPS: nn,mm

PARAM = VALUE

HOWMANY = Number of grids

The Return key inserts carriage returns in the command stream
file. On the keyboard, this key may be labeled “Return,” “Enter,” or
show a bent arrow pointing left. In general, carriage returns in a
command stream file are used to make the file easier to read: They
are not interpreted by ZCL.

Related Documentation
The following guide is available from your system administrator or
Landmark representative:

R2003.12.0

Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus/ZCL describes each of
the Landmark-supplied macros provided with Z-MAP Plus or
ZCL, how to the run a macro in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL how to create
a macro, and the structure of a macro. (“Appendix H. Macros” in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual also describes how to run a
macro in ZCL or Z-MAP Plus, how to create a macro, and the
structure of a macro.)

Typographic Conventions: Introduction

2

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Using ZCL

Overview
The following topics help you become familiar with ZCL and the ZCL
command stream:

R2003.12.0

“ZCL Basics” on page 4 describes ZCL and its uses.

“Understanding the Process Statement” on page 5 discusses
various parts of a ZCL command stream.

“Setting Up a ZCL Command Stream” on page 8 contains an
example of a ZCL command stream with several points for the
user to remember.

“Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File” on page 11
contains information on initializing ZCL, the debugging process,
and some of the common errors found by ZCL.

“Additional Information” on page 17 contains information on
converting units, the special processes (Data Block and Loop),
default output file name creation, using color tables, and arrays.

Overview

3

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

ZCL Basics
The Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL) Processor is a
command-driven mapping system especially tailored for execution in
the background processing environment. ZCL offers the facilities for
streamlining the production of large numbers of fixed format maps,
performing time-consuming gridding and contouring jobs, and
performing repetitive tasks such as those required in sensitivity studies
and equity determinations.
ZCL’s background processing facilities are complemented by
Landmark’s interactive mapping programs including Z-MAP Plus and
HARDCOPY. As all the data files and algorithms used in these
programs are identical, the maps produced by ZCL are identical to
those produced by the interactive programs.
ZCL reads its processing instructions from a disk file that contains the
ZCL command stream. This command stream contains the names of
data files, directives, and parameters necessary to describe the mapping
operations. ZCL file names should not include the following symbols: *
(asterisk), & (ampersand), @ (at), ~ (tilde), ^ (carat), or ‘ (apostrophe).1
The user has extensive control of the mapping process through the
many parameters available for each process. Existing ZCL command
streams can be modified easily in a text editor and combined to make
different types of maps or to satisfy the requirements of new mapping
jobs. Such a change in the interactive environment could require a
complete new session.
As with Landmark’s interactive programs, ZCL provides default values
for most parameters which the user leaves unspecified. A particularly
powerful feature of ZCL allows the user to specify that the parameters
for a ZCL command be inherited from a preceding ZCL command. In
this way, a simple change to a single parameter can be propagated
throughout an entire command stream.
ZCL first scans this command stream for syntax errors and then
executes each command in sequence. All reports are recorded in a log
file which can be viewed and printed.

1. A command file can be created with a system text editor or using Utilities➛ Process Logging in Z-MAP Plus.
For information about creating a command stream in Z-MAP Plus, see Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.

R2003.12.0

ZCL Basics: Using ZCL

4

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Understanding the Process Statement
Since a ZCL command stream consists of a sequence of processes, you
must first understand the syntax of a process statement before looking
at the syntax of the entire command stream. A process statement
consists of a process identifier followed by several parameters and a
terminator symbol.

Process Identifier
The process identifier consists of three parts:


process name (in either its full version or its alternate form)
use number
back reference number

A colon separates the name from the use number, and a comma
separates the use number from the back reference number. No more
than one space is allowed between the colon and the use number. For
example, a process identifier for a point gridding task might be
POINT GRIDDING: 010,000 or PGRD:010,000.
Process Name
The process descriptions give the full process name and the alternate
form of the process name if one is available. A colon (:) must follow
the process name, which must be entered in capital letters. While
spaces in the process name are not relevant to ZCL, consistency in how
you enter these names in the command stream may facilitate visual
checking of the command file.
Use Number
The use number is a number ranging from 001 to 999 which uniquely
labels this use of this process for subsequent reference (BRANCH,
DATA BLOCK). Use numbers 001 through 499 are reserved for the
user; use numbers 500 through 999 are reserved for ZCL. A use
number is not required; leave a blank space where the use number goes
and ZCL assigns a use number between 500 and 999.1

1. Z-MAP Plus Process Logging assigns use numbers sequentially beginning with 01.

R2003.12.0

Understanding the Process Statement: Using ZCL

5

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

The process use numbers need only be distinct for a given process
name. Thus, you can have the statements POINT GRIDDING: 10,00 and
CONTOUR: 10,00 in a ZCL command stream since the same use
numbers would be distinguished by different process names.
Back Reference Number
The back reference number, which may range from 000 to 999, allows
a process to refer back to the parameters supplied for a previous process
that has the same process name and a use number that matches this
back reference number. If a process does not back reference a previous
use of the process name, the back reference number can be 00 (zero
zero) or it can be left blank.
Back Reference No Longer Recommended
The use of the back reference number is no longer recommended by Landmark.
Specific assignment of parameters within each process is the recommended
procedure.

Parameters
The process parameters are separated from the process identifier by a
minimum of three blank spaces. The parameters must be separated
from each other by commas. Parameters are specified by a name, an =
(equals sign), and a value.
Parameter Name
Each parameter in a process has a name. Using Point Gridding as an
example, three of its parameters are called DATAIN, INFLD, and
XMIN. Parameter names must be typed in capital letters. As with
process names, spaces in the parameter name are not relevant to ZCL;
consistency in how you enter these names in your command stream
may facilitate visual checking of the command file.
Parameter Value
Each process parameter value is one of four data types. In the
documentation for each process, the data type for each parameter is I,
R, D or C*nn where:
I
R
D
C*nn

R2003.12.0

Integer value
Real (floating point) value
Double precision value
Character string where nn is the maximum length of the string

Understanding the Process Statement: Using ZCL

6

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

For data type C, the character string must be enclosed in single
quotation marks (′, using the apostrophe key), which do not count as
characters in the string. Because of this usage, single quotation marks
or apostrophes cannot be an internal part of the character string, though
any other character can.

Spacebar Character
Since commas are used to separate one parameter and its value from
another, spaces have no significance. Spaces may occur before or after
the equal sign, anywhere within numerical values, and before or after
the comma. However, spaces in a character string are preserved.
The specifications in the following parameter examples are valid:
PGRD:010,000
PGRD:011,000

DATAIN=’TEST1A.2 DUM1’, INFLD=7,
XMIN=37.5/
XMIN=-3 750.4, XMAX = +3 9 5 0.,
INFLD = 5 /

Arrays
Occasionally an array of values may be assigned to a parameter. For
example, the COPY Process, which copies graphic elements from one
picture to another, has a parameter named LBGTYPES. This parameter
may be set equal to any array of up to 40 integer entries. To do this,
merely set the parameter equal to the entries separated by commas:
LGBTYPES = 1, 7, 21, 37, 38, 39, FROM PICT=...

For more detail, see page 21.

End Process Symbol
Processes can be continued on as many lines as needed. The process is
terminated by a slash (/).

R2003.12.0

Understanding the Process Statement: Using ZCL

7

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Setting Up a ZCL Command Stream
A ZCL command stream consists of one or more process statements
followed by a STOP process statement; STOP is the only required
process. There is a maximum of 80 characters per line, but there is no
limit to the number of lines per process statement.
Most ZCL command streams start with the MFDS Process, which
specifies the MFDs available for use during the ZCL run.
MFDS Process Required for Writing Member Files
You must call the MFDS process to write a member file to a master or scratch file.

Mapping and modeling processes can then be invoked in any order
subject to a few logical restrictions. Comment statements can be
inserted between process statements to document the action of the
command file.
The following is an example of a ZCL command stream that:

specifies an MFD

builds two grids

subtracts one grid from the other, generating a thickness grid

draws a contour map of the thickness grid

shows all files in the MFD

stops
Example of a ZCL Command Stream
C
C
C
MFDS:010,000 NUMMFDS =
C
C
C
POINT GRIDDING:010,000

Specify a Master File (MFD)
1, MFD1 = ’DUA1:[GDP.DEH]TEST1.MFD’

/

Generate top and base grids
DATAIN = ’WELL PICKS’, INFLD = 4,
XMIN = -1350.,
XMAX = -1150.,
YMIN = 1450.,
YMAX = 1650.,
XINC = 25,
YINC = 25,
GRIDOUT = ’TOP OF FORMATION 1’,
MFDOUT = 2, MFDIN = 1 /

C
POINT GRIDDING:020,010 INFLD = 5,
GRIDOUT = ’BASE OF FORMATION 1’ /
C

R2003.12.0

Setting Up a ZCL Command Stream: Using ZCL

8

Landmark

C
C
DUAL GRID OPS:010,000

C
C
C
PICTURE:010,000

C
BORDER:010,000 /
C
LABEL N/E:010,000

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Subtract base from top generating thickness
OPNAME = ’SUBTRACT’,
GRIDIN1 = ’TOP OF FORMATION 1’,
MFDIN1 = 2,
MFDIN2 = 2,
GRIDIN2 = ’BASE OF FORMATION 1’,
GRIDOUT = ’THICKNESS FM 1’,
MFDOUT = 1 /
Display a contour map of the thickness grid
ZGFNAME = ’DUA1:[GDP.DEH]TEST1.ZGF’,
HEADER = ’PICTURE FILES FOR TEST1’,
NEWZGF = ’NEW’,
PICTURE = ’THICKNESS OF FM 1’,
NEWPICT = ’NEW’,
XMIN = -1350.,
XMAX = -1150.,
YMIN = 1450.,
YMAX = 1650.,
YBMARGIN = 2,
XMAPSCALE = 10., YMAPSCALE = 10 /

LABLMODE = ’TICKS’,
LABLFORM = ’COMMAS’,
LABLTANG = ’PAR-BORDER’, LABLSANG = ’PAR-BORDER’,
BRDRTICK = ’OUTSIDE’,
LABLSIDE =

’LEFT+BOTTOM’,
TINCR = 10, SINCR = 10
C
TITLE BLOCK:010,000

C
CONTOUR:010,000

C
C
C
SHOWFILES:010,000
C
C
C
STOP:999,000 /

R2003.12.0

/

TITLE1 = ’THICKNESS OF FORMATION 1’,
TITLE2 = ’BUILT BY GRIDDING THE TOP’,
TITLE3 = ’AND BASE AND SUBTRACTING’,
AUTHOR = ’A ZMAP USER’,
LOCATION = 1,
HEIGHT = 2,
SCALE = 10 /
FILEIN = ’THICKNESS OF FM 1’,
NCONTOUR = 0,
CONMIN = 0,
CONINT = 25,
MFDINPUT = 1 /
Show All Files
FILETYPE = ’ALL’

/

Stop The Run

Setting Up a ZCL Command Stream: Using ZCL

9

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

There are several things to notice in this example ZCL command file:

R2003.12.0

Comments are added between processes by entering a C in column
one, followed by a blank space and whatever comment you want to
make.

MFDs are referenced by the sequential order they occur in the
MFDS Process. The number of the scratch MFD is one more than
the number of the last MFD specified in the MFDS Process. In this
command file, our scratch MFD is number 2.

Many of the parameters for the second call to the POINT
GRIDDING Process did not have to be specified since they were
initialized from the first call.

Setting Up a ZCL Command Stream: Using ZCL

10

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File
You can run ZCL in foreground or in background. If you run ZCL in
the OpenWorks environment, you have access to processes that read or
write to the database. ZCL makes two passes through your command
file. The first pass checks for syntax errors; if none are found, a second
pass executes the processes. Errors are written to the screen in
foreground runs and to a user-specified file in background runs.

Running ZCL in the Foreground
To start ZCL running in the foreground, use either of the following
approaches:

If you are running Z-MAP Plus in standalone mode, from the
Z-MAP Plus Command Menu, select Applications → ZCL.

If you are running Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks, from the
OpenWorks Command Menu, select Applications →
Z-MAP Plus / PowerView, then from the Z-MAP Plus Command
Menu that appears, select Applications → ZCL.
Once ZCL is initialized, you are prompted to enter the name of the
ZCL command file. The following screen appears:
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION - LIMITED DISTRIBUTION
TO AUTHORIZED PERSONS ONLY
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROTECTED AS AN UNPUBLISHED WORK
UNDER THE U. S. COPYRIGHT ACT OF 1976. CREATED
1986. COPYRIGHT: ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. LANDMARK/Z-MAP , INC.

WELCOME TO ZCL
VERSION 2.1
15 APR 1993
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

This screen is followed by the content of the first process statement in
the command file, with any error reports it generates, displayed
between lines of dashes. Each subsequent process statement displays
below in the same way, until the STOP process is reached, completing
the run and returning you to the Z-MAP Plus window.

R2003.12.0

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File: Using ZCL

11

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

For example:
-----------------------------------------------------------------SHOW FILES: REPORT+ SUMMARY
OPENZGF:
ZGFNAME=’symbols.zgf’, NEWZGF=’OLD’ /
*ERROR* REPORT+SUMMARYOPENZG IS AN INVALID PARAMETER NAME.
DETECTED BETWEEN POSITIONS
83 AND
99 OF COMMAND
** THE CURRENT COMMAND RECORD IS **
OPENZGF:
ZGFNAME=’symbols.zgf’, NEWZGF=’OLD’ /
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CGMFILE:
ZGFNAME=’symbols.zgf’, LGBMODE=’ALL’, SENDFILE=’YES’,
CGMFILE=’symbols2.cgm’
/
SIZE OF THIS GRAPHICS FILE:
26
RECORDS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------STOP:
/
Z-MAP MAIN MENU
***********************************
0.
Exit
1.
ZMAPPLUS
2.
ZCL

R2003.12.0

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File: Using ZCL

12

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Running ZCL in the Background
To run ZCL in background mode, you specify the path to the ZCL
installation, the name of the command file to run, and the name of the
log file in which to write the error report. You also need to set the
ZTARGET environment variable. You must be in the OpenWorks
environment to access processes using the database.
To run in the OpenWorks environment, substituting the name of your
own command file and naming the log file as desired, at an xterm
prompt enter:
setenv ZTARGET $OWHOME/ZMAPPlus
$ZTARGET/sh/RZCL Command file > zcl.log &

To run in the non-OpenWorks environment, replacing root with the root
location of the ZCL installation (check with your system
administrator), substituting the name of your own command file, and
naming the log file as desired, at an xterm prompt enter:
setenv ZTARGET root/ZMAPPlus
$ZTARGET/sh/RZCL Command file > zcl.log &

On most platforms, a system message notifies you that the background
process is completed.

R2003.12.0

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File: Using ZCL

13

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Debugging a Command File
Although debugging a ZCL command file is highly dependent on the
processes in the command stream, a few general points may save you
time.
ZCL makes two passes through your command file, one checking for
syntax errors and the second executing the processes.
During the error checking pass, ZCL flags all errors until a needed file
or picture cannot be found or it reaches the STOP process. At that
point, ZCL stops and returns you to the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu.
The error message varies depending on the nature of the error, the
process that failed in ZCL, and whether or not any files were missing.
Additionally, ZCL reports any bad or missing parameter values.
You must correct the error related to the missing file or picture to debug
the rest of the command file. At the same time, you can correct any of
the other errors ZCL has found. Resubmit the ZCL command file and
repeat the error correction process until your run is error free.
A command file that is error free executes after the error check pass.
Debugging in the foreground is often the fastest method. However, if
there are many errors, they may scroll off of the screen too quickly or
there may be too many to remember. Background submission provides
a listing of the errors on the ZCL run log.
During ZCL error checking, ZCL checks that the files that will be used
exist. Therefore, all files that are used during a ZCL run must
previously exist or be created during the run. If a file does not exist, an
error is returned and you cannot proceed until the error is corrected.

R2003.12.0

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File: Using ZCL

14

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

If you are debugging one in a series of command streams, none of
which have been executed and all of which create files that are used in
following command streams, then the second and later ZCL command
streams will have compound file errors. To get around this problem you
must either:

Execute one command stream (creating the files) before you debug
the next.

Put all the command streams in one file, debug as one stream, and
then separate into smaller streams for execution. Do not forget to
remove the STOP processes from the combined set of ZCL
command streams.

Caution is required when you are debugging a ZCL command stream
which uses graphics files and pictures, since ZCL initializes any
graphics files and pictures marked as NEW. After ZCL has evaluated
the parameters for a PICTURE Process, any graphics files or pictures
created by that process exist. Therefore, you should use new graphics
files with each ZCL run.

R2003.12.0

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File: Using ZCL

15

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Common Errors Found by ZCL
Here are some common errors found by ZCL:









non-unique use numbers
incorrect symbols in file name
a back reference number referencing a non-existent use number
missing commas
missing starting or ending quotation mark
misspelled process name
misspelled parameter name
invalid parameter value type
missing required parameter
missing or misspelled file name
ZCL File Names Should Not Use Some Symbols
ZCL file names should not include the following symbols:
* (asterisk), & (ampersand), @ (at), ~ (tilde), ^ (carat), or ‘ (apostrophe).

R2003.12.0

Running and Debugging a ZCL Command File: Using ZCL

16

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Additional Information
This topic provides information regarding the use of some of the
special processes and how they relate to one another, as well as some
general background information. Topics include:





conversion from inches to centimeters
using the DATA BLOCK Process
using the LOOP Process
default output file name creation
using color tables
arrays

Conversion from Inches to Centimeters
All ZCL parameters which may be entered as either inches or
centimeters are interpreted according to the parameter UNITS in the
SYSTEM PARMS Process. These values (as well as defaults and
ranges) are considered inches if UNITS = ENGLISH and centimeters if
UNITS = METRIC; the default is ENGLISH.
The following technique is used after converting from inches to
centimeters to produce a “nice” centimeter value:

R2003.12.0

If the absolute value is between 0 and 1, then it is rounded to two
significant places with the least significant digit a multiple of 5.

If the absolute value is between 1 and 100, then it is rounded to the
nearest 0.5 centimeter.

If the absolute value is greater than 100, then it is rounded to the
nearest centimeter.

Additional Information: Using ZCL

17

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

For example:
Table 1:
Inches
In

Converted
cm

0.05
0.07
0.09
0.1
0.11
0.2
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
10.0

0.13
0.18
0.23
0.25
0.28
0.51
0.64
1.27
2.54
5.08
7.62
10.16
25.4

“Nice”
cm
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.25
0.30
0.5
0.65
1.5
2.5
5.0
7.5
10.0
25.5

Using the DATA BLOCK Process
The DATA BLOCK Process allows you to input, in one place in your
ZCL command stream, a value that can be used by many parameters in
that command stream. Multiple values can be entered in one call to the
DATA BLOCK Process, but they must all be the same data type (I, R,
D, or C). A parameter references a value in the DATA BLOCK Process
by specifying the use number of the desired DATA BLOCK Process
and the number of the value’s position in the list of values for that
DATA BLOCK Process. The exact syntax is presented in the
documentation for the DATA BLOCK Process (see page 107);
however, the following example should clarify these points:
DATA BLOCK:010,000

LABEL N/E:010,000
LABEL N/E:020,000

HOWMANY = 5,
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’,
DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 3, 7, 9, 2, 47
NTMIDTIC = #10(4) /
NTMIDTIC = #10(1) /

/

In this example, the DATA BLOCK Process is assigned five integer
values: 3, 7, 9, 2, 47. The first border labeling process uses the fourth
integer value (2) for the parameter NTMIDTIC, and the second
LABEL N/E Process uses the first value (3).

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

18

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

It is frequently desirable to execute a set of processes several times,
with the values of the parameters changing each time. This can be done
with the LOOP Process (as described in “Using the LOOP Process” on
page 20). The DATA BLOCK Process is used to provide data values
for the parameters in each iteration of the loop. In the looping process,
each loop iteration is assigned a number. That number corresponds to
the number of the value’s position in the array of DATA BLOCK
Process values. This means that the LOOP Process controls which
value in the DATA BLOCK Process is used, and the parameter entry
within the loop need only specify the use number of the DATA BLOCK
Process that contains its values.
The following example should clarify these points:
DATA BLOCK:010,000

HOW MANY = , DATA TYPE = ’REAL’,
DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 10, 25, 50, 100
/
DATA BLOCK:020,000
HOWMANY = 3, DATATYPE ’REAL’,
DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 100,250,500 /
LOOP:010,000
FIRST = 1, LAST = 3
PICTURE:010,000 ...XMAPSCALE = #20,
YMAPSCALE = #20,.../
BORDER:010,000 ...... /
CONTOUR:010,000... CONSTEP = #10, .... /
LOOP END:010,000 /

In this example, the loop executes three times, making three pictures.
The scale and contour interval for the first picture are 100 and 10, for
the second are 250 and 25, and for the third are 500 and 50. Notice that
the first DATA BLOCK Process contains more values than are used by
the loop. If the DATA BLOCK Process did not contain enough values,
an error would occur.

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

19

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Using the LOOP Process
The LOOP Process allows you to execute one or more processes
several times. As discussed in the previous topic on DATA BLOCK
Process, the LOOP and DATA BLOCK Processes work together to
build these iterations. The exact syntax is presented in the
documentation of the LOOP Process (see page 290); however, a few
general points about looping are presented here.

The loop has starting and ending (FIRST, LAST) iteration values.
These tell the loop how many times to execute (LAST – FIRST
+ 1), and the value position in the array of values for each DATA
BLOCK Process that is referenced from the loop. For example,
FIRST = 3, LAST = 4 would execute the loop twice, using the
third value in the DATA BLOCK Process list for the first iteration
and the fourth value for the second iteration.

There may be several loops in one ZCL command stream.

Different loops or different parameters within the same loop may
reference the same DATA BLOCK Process.

Loops cannot calculate correct parameter defaults. Loops in ZCL
must be programmed to produce the correct defaults.
For example, if the contour interval changes with each iteration of
the loop and you want approximately 20 contour levels, then you
must set up the default calculation by getting the grid’s Z-range
from the GRID STATISTICS process, divide the Z-range by 20,
and then round off to the whole number. This number is used as
the default contour interval for the loop.

Default Output File Name Creation
Default output file names are created in two ways: based on an input
file name or based on a field name.
Based on Input File Name
If there is only one input file and an output file name is needed, but not
specified, then the file name is created by adding a single character to
identify the type of file, followed by a slash (/) followed by the input
file name, for a maximum of 24 characters. For example:
FILEIN = ’TOP OF MUDDY’
FILEOUT = ’G/TOP OF MUDDY’ if input file was a grid file
FILEOUT = ’D/TOP OF MUDDY’ if input file was a data file

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

20

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Based on Input Field Name
If there is a new field being created and no output file name is specified,
then the file name is created by adding a slash (/) followed by the name
of the new field being created, for a maximum of 20 characters. For
example:
FLDNAME = ’NEW FIELD’
FILEOUT = ’/NEW FIELD’

Or, if the field name was not specified but the field number was, then
the default field name for that field number is used. (Default field
names can be found in “Appendix B. File and Field Codes” in the
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.) For example:
INFLD = 3 (default field name = Z VALUE)
FILEOUT = ’/Z VALUE’

Using Color Tables
All process parameters that specify a color index refer to a position on
the active color table. (For more detail, see “Appendix F. Color
Editing” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.)
ZCL has two methods for accessing a color table:

Use the PICTURE Process to open an existing picture; the color
table associated with this picture is then the active color table.

Use the COLOR TABLE Process to read a color table from a disk
file.

ZCL cannot be used to interactively change values of the color
associated with a color index. It is therefore suggested that you use
Z-MAP Plus to interactively respecify a particular color or interpolate
colors for colorfill, then write the color table to disk.

Arrays
Arrays are used in a number of ZCL processes. In each ZCL process
where a ZCL parameter is an array, only the first entry is described.
A ZCL parameter might be described as follows:
VALUE

R2003.12.0

Array of up to N values for this process.

Additional Information: Using ZCL

21

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

You have two ways of entering the array elements:

as a list of entries separated by commas
ZCL process:

VALUE = Z1, Z2, , Z4, ..., ZN,

as separate ZCL parameters
ZCL process:

VALUE = Z1, VALUE2 = Z2, VALUE4 = Z4,
..., VALUEN = ZN

where Z1–ZN are the values and “, ,” indicates a missing value.
The first way is the simplest and easiest; however, sometimes separate
entries are required.
Frequently, an array such as a list of input files has corresponding
arrays for other parameters. The position of the elements in these
subsequent arrays must correspond. For example:
MFDS:010,000 NUMMFDS = 2, MFD1 =’TEST1.MFD’, MFD2 =’TEST2.MFD’
XSEC NEW:010,000
GRIDIN=’GRID1’, ’GRID2’, ’Next’, ’LAST’
MFDGRD=2, , 1, ,
FAULTS=’FAULT1’,’FAULT2’,’Next,’Last’

In this case, FAULT1 is used with GRID1, which is on MFD2; fault
Next is used with grid Next, which is on MFD1.

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

22

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

A list of the processes, the main array names, and additional element
names begins on the following page.
Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

BASEMAP DETAIL

LGBTYPES

LGBTYPE2 – LGBTYPE9
LGBTYP10 – LGBTYP40

BLANK GRID

POLYIDS

POLYID2 – POLYID40

CGM FILE

LGBTYPES

LGBTYPE2 – LGBTYPE9
LGBTYP10 – LGBTYP41

COMPUTE CELL VALUE

FAULTS

FAULT2 – FAULT10

FLDNAMS

FLDNAM2 – FLDNAM10

GRIDS

GRID2 – GRID10

METHODS

METHOD2 – METHOD10

MFDFLTS

MFDFLT2 – MFDFLT10

MFDGRDS

MFDGRD2 – MFDGRD10

CONTOUR

CONVALS

CONTOUR2 – CONTOUR9

CONTOUR NEW

BLANK1

BLANK2 – BLANK20

BOLD1

BOLD2 – BOLD20

DASH1

DASH2 – DASH20

ELEVEL1

ELEVEL2 – ELEVEL20

FNEWCL1

FNEWCL2 – FNEWCL20

HACH1

HACH2 – HACH20

LABEL1

LABEL2 – LABEL20

LCOLOR1

LCOLOR2 – LCOLOR20

LGBTYPES

LGBTYPE2 – LGBTYPE9

COPY PICTURE

LGBTYP10 – LGBTYP40
CROSS SECTION NEW

DATA BLOCK

R2003.12.0

FAULTS

FAULT2 – FAULT10

GRIDIN

GRIDIN2 – GRIDIN10

MFDFLT

MFDFLT2 – MFDFLT10

MFDGRD

MFDGRD2 – MFDGRD10

MFDOUT

MFDOUT2 – MFDOUT10

XSECNM

XSECNM2 – XSECNM10

XSECOT

XSECOT2 – XSECOT10

VALUE

VALUE2 – VALUE97

Additional Information: Using ZCL

23

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

DATA BLOCK LOAD

FORMATS

FORMAT2 – FORMAT20

INTGFLDS

INTGFL02 – INTGFL20

REALFLDS

REALFL02 – REALFL20

TEXTFLDS

TEXTFL02 – TEXTFL20

DATA ENUMERATION

INFLDS

INFLD2 – INFLD10

DEV WELL POST

BOTFLDS

BOTFLD2 – BOTFLD12

NDECBS

NDECB2 – NDECB12

NDECTS

NDECT2 – NDECT12

LBLZBS

LBLZB2 – LBLZB12

LBLZTS

LBLZT2 – LBLZT12

LOCATEB

LOCATB2 – LOCATB12

LOCATET

LOCATT2 – LOCATT12

TOPFLDS

TOPFLD2 – TOPFLD12

ZCLRBS

ZCLRB2 – ZCLRB50

ZCLRTS

ZCLRT2 – ZCLRT50

ZNONBS

ZNONB2 – ZNONB12

ZNONTS

ZNONT2 – ZNONT12

DIP VECTOR PLOT

MAGLEVS

MAGLEV2 – MAGLEV20

DISPLAY

LGBTYPES

LGBTYPE2 – LGBTYPE9
LGBTYP10 – LGBTYP41

EQUITY REPORT

EXPORT ZGF FILE

DATAINS

DATAIN2 – DATAIN10

MFDINS

MFDIN2 – MFDIN10

TITLE

TITLE2 – TITLE10

PICTURES

PICTURE2 – PICTURE9
PICTUR10 – PICTUR50

FAULT LOCATOR

FALTAFLD

FALTAFL2 – FALTAFL9
FALTAF10

FALTDFLD

FALTDFL2 – FALTDFL9
FALTDF10

FALTTFLD

FALTTFL2 – FALTTFL9
FALTTF10

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

24

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

FAULT LOCATOR NEW

COPYFLDS

COPYFLD2 – COPYFLD9
COPYFL10 – COPYFL45

FALTAFLD

FALTAFL2 – FALTAFL9
FALTAF10

FALTDFLD

FALTDFL2 – FALTDFL9
FALTDF10

FALTTFLD

FALTTFL2 – FALTTFL9
FALTTF10

FALTZFLD

FALTZFL2 – FALTZFL9
FALTZF10

FILE CONVERSION

INFLDS

INFLD2 – INFLD15

FILE LISTING

COLHDRS

COLHDR2 – COLHDR10

FORMATS

FORMAT2 – FORMAT10

HDRWIDS

HDRWID2 – HDRWID10

INFLDS

INFLD2 – INFLD10

WINFLDS

WINFLD2 – WINFLD10

WINMAXS

WINMAX2 – WINMAX10

WINMINS

WINMIN2 – WINMIN10

FLDNAMS

FLDNAM2 – FLDNAM45

FLDTYPS

FLDTYP2 – FLDTYP45

FORMATS

FORMAT2 – FORMAT45

INFLDS

INFLD2 – INFLD45

ZNONS

ZNON2 – ZNON45

LGBTYPES

LGBTYPE2 – LGBTYPE9

FILE UTILITY

HARDCOPY

LGBTYP10 – LGBTYP40
HORIZON PENETRATE

IMPORT CPS FILE

R2003.12.0

FAULTS

FAULT2 – FAULT20

GRIDS

GRID2 – GRID20

METHODS

METHOD2 – METHOD50

MFDFLTS

MFDFLT2 – MFDFLT20

MFDGRDS

MFDGRD2 – MFDGRD20

OUTFLDS

OUTFLD2 – OUTFLD50

SRFNAMS

SRFNAM2 – SRFNAM20

SYMBOLS

SYMBOL2 – SYMBOL20

FLDNAMS

FLDNAM2 – FLDNAM50

FLDTYPS

FLDTYP2 – FLDTYP50

FORMATS

FORMAT2 – FORMAT50

ZNONS

ZNON2 – ZNON50

Additional Information: Using ZCL

25

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

LABEL XSEC

INFLD

INFLD2 – INFLD10

LABLIN

LABLIN2 – LABLIN10

LABLFLD

LABLFLD2 – LABLFLD9
LBLFLD10

LINE NAMES

LINNAMS

LINNAM2 – LINNAM30

WLDCRDS

WLDCRD2 – WLDCRD30

WLDMTHS

WLDMTH2 – WLDMTH30

BREAKDIS

BREAKD02 – BREAKD50

BREAKSPS

BREAKS02 – BREAKS50

DISCONTS

DISCON02 – DISCON50

FILLFLDS

FILLFL02 – FILLFL50

PROPMTHS

PROPMT02 – PROPMT50

RESBASES

RESBAS02 – RESBAS50

RESINCS

RESINC02 – RESINC50

SLVALAS

SLVALA02 – SLVALA20

SLVALBS

SLVALB02 – SLVALB20

SLTXTAS

SLTXTA02 – SLTXTA20

SLTXTBS

SLTXTB02 – SLTXTB20

MISTIE REDUCTION

LNAMES

LNAME2 – LNAME10

MULTIPLE GRID OPS

GRIDIN

GRIDIN2 – GRIDIN40

MFDIN

MFDIN2 – MFDIN40

LGBTYPES

LGBTYPE2 – LGBTYPE9

LINE RESAMPLING

OVERLAY

LGBTYP10 – LGBTYP40
PICTURE
PICTURE ASSEMBLY

GRIDIN

GRIDIN2 – GRIDIN10

MFDGRD

MFDGRD2 – MFDGRD10

LGBTYPES

LGBTYPE2 – LGBTYPE9
LGBTYP10 – LGBTYP40

POST DATA

R2003.12.0

INFLD

INFLD2 – INFLD12

LABLSIZE

LABLSZ2 – LABLSZ12

LOCATION

LOCATN2 – LOCATN12

NDECIMAL

NDECML2 – NDECML12

ZNON

ZNON2 – ZNON12

Additional Information: Using ZCL

26

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

POST DATA NEW

BOTFLDS

BOTFLD2 – BOTFLD12

FONTBS

FONTB2 – FONTB12

FONTIS

FONTI2

FONTTS

FONTT2 – FONTT12

LBCMODBS

LBCMDB2 – LBCMDB12

LBCMODIS

LBCMDI2

LBCMODTS

LBCMDT2 – LBCMDT12

LBLCLRBS

LBLCLB2 – LBLCLB12

LBLCLRIS

LBLCLI2

LBLCLRTS

LBLCLT2 – LBLCLT12

LBLSZBS

LBLSZB2 – LBLSZB12

LBLSZIS

LBLSZI2

LBLSZTS

LBLSZT2 – LBLSZT12

LCLRBFDS

LCLRBF2 – LCLRBF12

LCLRTFDS

LCLRTF2 – LCLRTF12

LINEFLDS

LINEFLD2

LOCATEB

LOCATB2 – LOCATB12

LOCATEI

LOCATEI2

LOCATET

LOCATT2 – LOCATT12

NDECBS

NDECB2 – NDECB12

NDECIS

NDECI2

NDECTS

NDECT2 – NDECT12

TOPFLDS

TOPFLD2 – TOPFLD12

ZCLRBS

ZCLRB2 – ZCLRB50

ZCLRIS

ZCLRI2 – ZCLR50

ZCLRLS

ZCLRL2 – ZCLRL50

ZCLRTS

ZCLRT2 – ZCLRT50

ZCLSMXBS

ZCLSMXB2 – ZCLSMXB6

ZCLSMXIS

ZCLSMXI2 – ZCLSMXI6

ZCLSMXTS

ZCLSMXT2 – ZCLSMXT6

ZPATRNS

ZPATRN2 – ZPATRN20

LABELS

LABEL2 – LABEL10

LABLSIZE

LABLSIZ2 – LABLSIZ9

POST LEASE

LBLSIZ10
POST SEISMIC

R2003.12.0

ZCLRS

ZCLR2 – ZCLR50

Additional Information: Using ZCL

27

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

POST SEISMIC NEW

3DANGLE

3DANGL02 – 3DANGL20

3DLNRATE

3DLNRA02 – 3DLNRA20

3DLNSTRT

3DLNST02 – 3DLNST20

3DNMCLR

3DNMCL02 – 3DNMCL20

3DNMSIZE

3DNMSI02 – 3DNMSI20

3DTKRATE

3DTKRA02 – 3DTKRA20

3DTKSTRT

3DTKST02 – 3DTKST20

ATTANGLE

ATTANG02 – ATTANG20

ATTBADD

ATTBAD02 – ATTBAD20

ATTBRATE

ATTBRA02 – ATTBRA20

ATTBSIZE

ATTBSI02 – ATTBSI20

DISTBRK

DISBR02 – DISBR20

LABLADD

LABLAD02 – LABLAD20

LABLANGL

LABLAN02 – LABLAN20

LABLRATE

LABLRA02 – LABLRA20

LABLSIZE

LABLSI02 – LABLSI20

LBLCLR

LBLCLR02 – LBLCLR20

LNANGLE

LNANGL02 – LNANGL20

LNCOLOR

LNCOLO02 – LNCOLO20

NAMESIZE

NAMESI02 – NAMESI20

NUMBRBRK

NUMBRB02 – NUMBRB20

POSTADD

POSTAD02 – POSTAD20

POSTRATE

POSTRA02 – POSTRA20

SIZETABL

SIZETA02 – SIZETA50

SLCTOPER

SLCTOP02 – SLCTOP20

SLTXTAS

SLTXTA02 – SLTXTA20

SLTXTBS

SLTXTB02 – SLTXTB20

SLVALAS

SLVALA02 – SLVALA20

SLVALBS

SLVALB02 – SLVALA20

SYMBOL

SYMBOL02 – SYMBOL20

SYMBSIZE

SYMBSI02 – SYMBSI20

SYMCLR

SYMCLR02 – SYMCLR20

TKPATTRN

TKPATT02 – TKPATT20

TKWEIGHT

TKWEIG02 – TKWEIG20

ZRNGTABL

ZRNGTA02 – ZRNGTA50

Additional Information: Using ZCL

28

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

POST STAR SYMBOL

CLSLMT1S

CLSLMT12 – CLSLMT16

CLSLMT2S

CLSLMT22 – CLSLMT26

CLSLMT3S

CLSLMT32 – CLSLMT36

CLSLMT4S

CLSLMT42 -CLSLMT46

CLSLMT5S

CLSLMT52 – CLSLMT56

CLSLMT6S

CLSLMT62 – CLSLMT66

CLSLMT7S

CLSLMT72 – CLSLMT76

CLSLMT8S

CLSLMT82 – CLSLMT86

LENMINS

LENMIN2 – LENMIN8

MINVALS

MINVAL2 – MINVAL8

NUMCLASS

NUMCLAS2 – NUMCLAS8

POSTFLDS

POSTFLD2 – POSTFLD8

ZNONS

ZNON2 – ZNON8

QUICK VOLUMETRICS

POLYIDS

POLYID2 – POLYID10

RANGE EDIT

FLDMAXS

FLDMAX2 – FLDMAX12

FLDMINS

FLDMIN2 – FLDMIN12

INFLDS

INFLD2 – INFLD12

SCALE BAR

SCTYPES

SCTYPES2 – SCTYPES7

SELECT

ANGLES

ANGLE2 – ANGLE10

LATORDGS

LATORDG2 – LATORDG9
LATORD10

LATORMNS

LATORMN2 – LATORMN9
LATORM10

LATORSCS

LATORSC2 – LATORSC9
LATORS10

LONORDGS

LONORDG2 – LONORDG9
LONORD10

LONORMNS

LONORMN2 – LONORMN9
LONORM10

LONORSCS

LONORSC2 – LONORSC9
LONORS10

MNLATDGS

MNLATDG2 – MNLATDG9
MNLATD10

MNLATMNS

MNLATMN2 – MNLATMN9
MNLATM10

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

29

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

SELECT (con’t)

MNLATSCS

MNLATSC2 – MNLATSC9
MNLATS10

MNLONDGS

MNLONDG2 – MNLONDG9
MNLOND10

MNLONMNS

MNLONMN2 – MNLONMN9
MNLONM10

MNLONSCS

MNLONSC2 – MNLONSC9
MNLONS10

MXLATDGS

MXLATDG2 – MXLATDG9
MXLATD10

MXLATMNS

MXLATMN2 – MXLATMN9
MXLATM10

MXLATSCS

MXLATSC2 – MXLATSC9
MXLATS10

MXLONDGS

MXLONDG2 – MXLONDG9
MXLOND10

MXLONMNS

MXLONMN2 – MXLONMN9
MXLONM10

MXLONSCS

MXLONSC2 – MXLONSC9
MXLONS10

POLYIDS

POLYID2 – POLYID40

RANGFLDS

RANGFLD2 – RANGFLD9
RANGFD10

RNGOPERS

RNGOPER2 – RNGOPER9
RNGOPE10

RNGTXTAS

RNGTXTA2 – RNGTXTA9
RNGTXA10

RNGTXTBS

RNGTXTB2 – RNGTXTB9
RNGTXB10

RNGVALAS

RNGVALA2 – RNGVALA9
RNGVAA10

RNGVALBS

RNGVALB2 – RNGVALB9
RNGVAB10

R2003.12.0

SIDEAS

SIDEA2 – SIDEA10

SIDEBS

SIDEB2 – SIDEB10

Additional Information: Using ZCL

30

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

SELECT (con’t)

THINADDS

THINADD2 – THINADD9
THINAD10

THNDISTS

THNDIST2 – THNDIST9
THNDIS10

THNRATES

THNRATE2 – THNRATE9
THNRAT10

THNTXTAS

THNTXT2 – THNTXTA9
THNTXA10

THNTXTBS

THNTXTB2 – THNTXTB9
THNTXB10

THNVALAS

THNVALA2 – THNVALA9
THNVAA10

THNVALBS

THNVALB2 – THNVALB9
THNVAB10

XMAXS

XMAX2 – XMAX10

XMINS

XMIN2 – XMIN10

XORIGINS

XORIGIN2 – XORIGIN9
XORIGI10

YMAXS

YMAX2 – YMAX10

YMINS

YMIN2 – YMIN10

YORIGINS

YORIGIN2 – YORIGIN9
YORIGI10

SHOW FILES

FILETYPE

FILETYP2 – FILETYP9
FILETY10

SIMPLE OVERPOST

R2003.12.0

LINE1

LINE1B – LINE1C

LINE2

LINE2B – LINE2C

LINE3

LINE3B – LINE3C

LINE4

LINE4B – LINE4C

LINE5

LINE5B – LINE5C

LINE6

LINE6B – LINE6C

LINE7

LINE7B – LINE7C

LINE8

LINE8B – LINE8C

LINE9

LINE9B – LINE9C

LINE10

LINE10B – LINE10C

LINE11

LINE11B – LINE11C

LINE12

LINE12B – LINE12C

Additional Information: Using ZCL

31

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

SIMPLE OVERPOST (con’t)

LINE13

LINE13B – LINE13C

LINE14

LINE14B – LINE14C

LINE15

LINE15B – LINE15C

LINE16

LINE16B – LINE16C

LINE17

LINE17B – LINE17C

LINE18

LINE18B – LINE18C

LINE19

LINE19B – LINE19C

LINE20

LINE20B – LINE20C

NODEC1

NODEC1B – NODEC1C

NODEC2

NODEC2B – NODEC2C

NODEC3

NODEC3B – NODEC3C

NODEC4

NODEC4B – NODEC4C

NODEC5

NODEC5B – NODEC5C

NODEC6

NODEC6B – NODEC6C

NODEC7

NODEC7B – NODEC7C

NODEC8

NODEC8B – NODEC8C

NODEC9

NODEC9B – NODEC9C

NODEC10

NODEC10B – NODEC10C

NODEC11

NODEC11B – NODEC11C

NODEC12

NODEC12B – NODEC12C

NODEC13

NODEC13B – NODEC13C

NODEC14

NODEC14B – NODEC14C

NODEC15

NODEC15B – NODEC15C

NODEC16

NODEC16B – NODEC16C

NODEC17

NODEC17B – NODEC17C

NODEC18

NODEC18B – NODEC18C

NODEC19

NODEC19B – NODEC19C

NODEC20

NODEC20B – NODEC20C

SORTFLDS

SORTFLD2 – SORTFLD9

SORT

SORTFL10

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

32

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

SURFACES DIAGRAM

BASEMAP

BASEMAP2 – BASEMAP9
BASEMA10

BDFDRW

BDFDRW2 – BDFDRW10

BDFGRD

BDFGRD2 – BDFGRD10

BGZMIN

BGZMIN2 – BGZMIN10

BOTCLR

BOTCLR2 – BOTCLR10

BOXCLR

BOXCLR2 – BOXCLR10

DBLGBS

DBLGBS2 – DBLGBS10

FAULTS

FAULTS2 – FAULTS10

FLTCLR

FLTCLR2 – FLTCLR10

FLTIFLD

FLDIFLD2 – FLDIFLD9
FLDIFL10

FLTXFLD

FLDXFLD2 – FLDXFLD9
FLDXFL10

FLTYFLD

FLDYFLD2 – FLDYFLD9
FLDYFL10

FLTZFLD

FLDZFLD2 – FLDZFLD9
FLDZFL10

GRIDIN

GRIDIN2 – GRIDIN10

GRDLINK

GRDLINK2 – GRDLINK9
GRDLIN10

R2003.12.0

LABELS

LABELS2 – LABELS10

LGBS1S

LGBS12 – LGBS140

LGBS2S

LGBS22 – LGBS240

LGBS3S

LGBS32 – LGBS340

LGBS4S

LGBS42 – LGBS440

LGBS5S

LGBS52 – LGBS540

LGBS6S

LGBS62 – LGBS640

LGBS7S

LGBS72 – LGBS740

LGBS8S

LGBS82 – LGBS840

LGBS9S

LGBS92 – LGBS940

LGBS10S

LGBS102 – LGBS1040

MESBOT

MESBOT2 – MESBOT10

MESTOP

MESTOP2 – MESTOP10

MFDFLT

MFDFLT2 – MFDFLT10

MFDGRD

MFDGRD2 – MFDGRD10

Additional Information: Using ZCL

33

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

SURFACES DIAGRAM
(con’t)

TOPCLR

TOPCLR2 – TOPCLR10

WZMAX

WZMAX2 – WZMAX10

WZMIN

WZMIN2 – WZMIN10

ZDECIMAL

ZDECIMA2 – ZDECIMA9
ZDECIM10

ZINCLABL

ZINCLAB2 – ZINCLAB9
ZINCLA10

ZMAXLABL

ZMAXLAB2 – ZMAXLAB9
ZMAXLA10

ZMINLABL

ZMINLAB2 – ZMINLAB9
ZMINLA10

ZNNCLR

ZNNCLR2 – ZNNCLR10

ZNNRPL

ZNNRPL2 – ZNNRPL10

ZSCALE

ZSCALE2 – ZSCALE10

ZSIZLABL

ZSIZLAB2 – ZSIZLAB9
ZSIZLA10

THINNING

THIN TEXT FIELDS

WINFLDS

WINFLD2 – WINFLD10

WINMAXS

WINMAX2 – WINMAX10

WINMINS

WINMIN2 – WINMIN10

FIELDS

FIELD2 – FIELD10

FLDNAMES

FLDNAME2 – FLDNAME9
FLDNAM10

THREE D TIMESLICE
TRI SCALING

GRIDIN

GRIDIN2 – GRIDIN30

MFDGRDS

MFDGRD2 – MFDGRD30

XINPUTS

XINPUT2 – XINPUT50

YINPUTS

YINPUT2 – YINPUT50

XOUTPUTS

XOUTPUT2 – XOUTPUT9
XOUTPT10 – XOUTPT50

YOUTPUTS

YOUTPUT2 – YOUTPUT9
YOUTPT10 – YOUTPT50

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

34

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

USER GRID FILTER

WGHTiijj a

WGHT0101 – WGHT1301
WGHT0102 – WGHT1302
WGHT0103 – WGHT1303
WGHT0104 – WGHT1304
WGHT0105 – WGHT1305
WGHT0106 – WGHT1306
WGHT0107 – WGHT1307
WGHT0108 – WGHT1308
WGHT0109 – WGHT1309
WGHT0110 – WGHT1310
WGHT0111 – WGHT1311
WGHT0112 – WGHT1312
WGHT0113 – WGHT1313

VELO GRIDDING

VOLUME REPORT

WRITE CELL TABLE

RINGi

RING1 – RING99

CONFFLDS

CONFFLD2 – CONFFLD5

GRIDS

GRID2 – GRID5

INFLDS

INFLD2 – INFLD5

MFDGRD

MFDGRD2 – MFDGRD5

COLUMNS

COLUMN2 – COLUMN10

COLHEADS

CLHEAD2 – CLHEAD10

DATAINS

DATAIN2 – DATAIN10

GRIDS

GRID2 – GRID10

MFDINS

MFDIN2 – MFDIN10

MFDTOTS

MFDTOT2 – MFDTOT5

TITLE

TITLE2 – TITLE10

TOTALS

TOTAL2 – TOTAL5

INFLDS

INFLD2 – INFLD20

OUTFILES

OUTFILE2 – OUTFILE9
OUTFIL10 – OUTFIL20

PROPNAMS

PROPNAM2 – PROPNAM9
PROPNM10 – PROPNM20

VALUES

R2003.12.0

VALUE2 – VALUE20

Additional Information: Using ZCL

35

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Name

Main Array
Name

Additional Element
Names

WRITE TEXT

FORMATS

FORMAT2 – FORMAT20

JUSTCHRS

JUSTCHR2 – JUSTCHR9
JUSTCH10 – JUSTCH20

NUMCHARS

NUMCHAR2 – NUMCHAR9
NUMCHA10 – NUMCHA20

ORDERS

ORDER2 – ORDER40

REALOUTS

REALOUT2 – REALOUT9
REALOU10 – REALOU20

TEXTOUTS

TEXTOUT2 – TEXTOUT9
TEXTOU10 – TEXTOU20

a. This array defines a grid where ii is the number of the row and jj is the number
of the column. Since grids are read column by column, the main array lists the
values of the grid nodes column by column, and the additional element names are
in groups of 13 where the column number remains the same as the row number
increment

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Using ZCL

36

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Process Descriptions

Presentation of Information
Processes are presented alphabetically by process name.

Parts of a Process Description
Each process description includes most of the following elements:

Process name

Alternate name

Function

Notes

Example

Valid combinations

Parameters listing
Process Name
The process name invokes the process in the ZCL command stream.
Alternate Name
The shortened or abbreviated process name, if it exists, can be used in
place of the “long” name in a ZCL command stream. Some alternate
names are not shorter, just different.
Function
Function gives a description of what the process does.

R2003.12.0

Presentation of Information

37

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Notes
The notes describe other processes that must be called before the
current process can be executed. The noted processes are the ones that
produce a ZCL or runtime error, for example, processes used to create
files or set projection parameters.
Example
Examples demonstrate how to fill out some parameters or present a
ZCL command stream of the process.
Valid Combinations
Tables are included that describe the parameter combinations required
for setting up a particular process.
Parameters Listing
The parameters listing is made up of five elements. These are:

required/conditionally required bullet

ZCL parameter name

data type

range

description and default
Required/Conditionally Required Bullet
The bullets are footnoted:
• Designates a parameter which is required
° Designates a parameter which is conditionally required

A parameter lacking a bullet is not required.
Parameter Name
The ZCL Parameters available for the specific ZCL process are listed
in the recommended order to be called in a ZCL command stream.
Data Type
Data types are I, R, D or C*nn where:
I
R
D
C*nn

R2003.12.0

=
=
=
=

Integer value
Real (floating point) value
Double precision value
Character string where nn is the maximum length of the character string

Presentation of Information: Process Descriptions

38

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Range
The range of valid values for the parameter are given in this column or
below the description and default.
About Master File Numbers
For input files, 0 refers to any MFD.
For output files, 0 refers to the scratch file.

Description and Default Column
The parameter description includes a general description, appropriate
precautions, and standard defaults, options and range options (where
applicable).
Default
The default value of a parameter; this is the value a parameter receives
if no value is supplied by the user. The user may supply a parameter
value directly, through reference to a previous process, or through
reference to a DATA BLOCK process.
A Default value of Blank means that the parameter is set to cause a null
effect.
A Default value of None means that a value need not be specified.
Options
Options which are valid for a particular parameter are listed with their
meanings.
Entering Options
Surround option values with single quotes (apostrophe character) when you enter
them; spaces as presented are required.

Range Options
Range options that do not fit well in the Range column are listed below
other information in the Description and Default column.

R2003.12.0

Presentation of Information: Process Descriptions

39

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Additional Information
Typically, there is enough information in the documentation for you to
execute a process even if you have never used the equivalent
Z-MAP Plus task before.
Appendixes provide additional information about and examples of:









Graphics Feature (Segment Type) Codes
Data File Type Codes
Data Field Type Codes
Well Symbols
Font Types
Line Patterns
State Plane Projection Codes
Color Representation Section and Color Index Section of the
Default Color Table
Reference Spheroids
Macro creation and execution
Color Index Referenced by a Process
The color index specified by a process parameter refers to that color index in the
color table associated with the current picture.

For information about chaining processes together, using a macro, or
writing a macro, see “Appendix H. Macros” in the Z-MAP Plus
Reference Manual.
Spaces in Process Names, Parameters, and Options
Spaces in process names are optional; in some examples the spaces have been
omitted. Spaces as presented in parameters and options are required.

R2003.12.0

Additional Information: Process Descriptions

40

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Arc to Polygon
Name

ARC TO POLYGON

Alternate Name ATOP
Function

This process takes a file of lines as input and converts the lines into
closed polygons. The input file can be any file with a segment ID field.
Input lines are cut where they cross, and the cut lines are joined
together to create polygons.
A rectangular frame is defined around the input line traces. The frame
is included as part of one or more of the output polygons. The frame
can be:
• defined by the coordinates of an input grid,
• defined by explicitly defined frame values, or
• calculated by building a bounding box around the input line traces.
Lines that are close to each other automatically snap to each other. A
tolerance parameter is required to control this process. No tolerance
default is supplied.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• LINESIN

Data
Type
C*24

MFDLINES

I

GRIDIN

R2003.12.0

Name of the input vertex (VERT) or fault (FALT) file.
0–5

C*24

MFDGRD

I

• POLYOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

XFIELD

Range Description and Default

I

Number of the MFD where the input file resides.
Default Value = 0
Name of the optional GRID file.

0-5 Number of the MFD that contains the GRID file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output polygon VERT file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that will contain the new polygon
file.
Default Value = 0
Number of the X-field in the input file.
Default Value = If no number is specified, the first X field
is selected by default.

Process

41

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

YFIELD

I

Number of the Y-field in the input file.
Default Value = If no number is specified, the first Y field
is selected by default.N.

IDFLD

I

Field number of the field that contains the segment ID
information in the input file.
Default Value = If no number is specified, the first ID
field is selected.

C*12

Determines the type of progress report generated by the
process.
Default Value = FULL
Options:

REPORT

ERRORS
STATISTICS
FULL

FRXMIN

R

The minimum X value of the frame.
Default Value = None

FRXMAX

R

The maximum X value of the frame.
Default Value = None

FRYMIN

R

The minimum Y value of the frame.
Default Value = None

FRYMAX

R

The maximum Y value of the frame.
Default Value = None

R

Tolerance value is required to snap close lines.
Default Value = None

• TOLER

R2003.12.0

= Output only errors.
= Output intermediate reports
= Output everything

Process

42

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Back Interpolate
Name

BACK INTERPOLATE

Alternate Name BK IN
Function

This process interpolates z values stored in the input grid at data point
locations provided by an input control point file. The results are placed
in a specific field in the input control point file (either replacing an
existing field or creating another field). The input control point file and
the new back interpolated values are output as a new control point file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT
• DATAIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.
0–5

Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

C*24

MFDDATA

I

OUTFLD

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input control point file, it must have an X
field and a Y field.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the output field.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control
point file, then legitimate values for the output field
would be from 0 to N+1 but not N+2.
A value of 0 or N+1 means that a new field is created; a
value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input control point file is replaced by this output field.
Note: You cannot replace a character field; you must
create a new one.
Default Value = 0, create a new field

Process

43

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FLDNAME

C*20

Name for the output z field.
Default Value = Old field name, if this z field is to replace
an existing field in the input file
or
Z-VALUE, if a new z field is being created

DATAOUT

C*24

Name of the output control point file.

MFDOUT

STRATEGY

I

C*12

Range Description and Default

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output control point
file.
Default Value = 1
Control point positions to use.
Note: Choices NO ZNON and ONLY ZNON make sense
only if the OUTFLD is not new (0).
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL
NO ZNON

ONLY
ZNON

ZNON

R2003.12.0

R

= Back interpolate at ALL control point
positions.
= Back interpolate at only those control point
positions that previously had well-defined
(non-ZNON) values.
= Back interpolate at only those control point
positions that previously had null data
(ZNON) values.

Null data value to use for the output field, OUTFLD.
Default Value = If OUTFLD already exists in the input
control point file and is being replaced by the
back-interpolated value, the existing ZNON
value for that field serves as the default value
or
If OUTFLD creates a new field, the default
value is 1.0E+30

Process

44

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Basemap Detail
Name

BASEMAP DETAIL

Alternate Name MAKE BDF
Function

This process converts a picture in a graphics file into a Basemap Detail
File for use in Z-3D.
This process supports two different methods of defining any array.
In the first method, the array elements are listed as part of the process
command. For example, LGBTYPES = 1,4,6 defines the first 3
elements in the graphics feature array.
In the second method, the array is stored in a Data Block and
referenced by the Data Block’s use number. For example, DBLGBS =
40 would cause the graphics feature numbers to extract from Data
Block 40, starting from the beginning of the Data Block.
All parameters referencing Data Block arrays have names with the
prefix DB. If a Data Block value is left empty, the defaults are blank
for data type TEXT, and 0 for data type REAL or INTEGER.

Example
DATA BLOCK: 40,00 HOWMANY = 3, DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’, DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 1, 4, 6 /
BASEMAP DETAIL: 10,00 ZGFNAME
PICTURE
BASEMAP
DBLGBS

=
=
=
=

’GRAPHICS.ZGF’,
’BASEMAP PICTURE’,
’BASEMAP.BDF’,
40 /

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to
convert.

• PICTURE

C*80

Name of the picture to convert.

• BASEMAP

C*80

Name of the output Basemap Detail File.

Process

45

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
DBLGBS

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
Number of the Data Block that contains the list of
graphics features to output.
Note: If DBLGBS = 0, the list of graphics features to use
is taken from LGBTYPES. For a list of valid
graphics features, see “Appendix A. Graphics
Feature Codes” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference
Manual.
Default Value = 0
The Data Block that contains the graphics features should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of graphics features to
output
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range options for each element of VALUE in the Data
Block:
1–1000
= Output that feature
0
= Ignore
<0
= Output all features

LGBTYPES

I

≤1000 Array of up to 40 graphics feature types to copy. One
code is assigned to each feature, unless all available types
are copied, in which case set LGBTYPES to a negative
number. For a complete list of available graphics features,
see “Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes” in the Z-MAP
Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = Output all features
Range Options:
1–1000

R2003.12.0

= Output that feature

0

= Ignore

<0

= Output all features

Process

46

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Blank Data
Name

BLANK DATA

Alternate Name DA BK
Function

This process allows for the blanking of data values inside or outside a
convex polygon.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

• VERTICES

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Name of the input data file.
0–5

Field number of the field to blank.
Default Value = First Z Value field

C*24

MFDVERT

I

OUTFLD

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0

Name of the vertex file that contains the polygon.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the output field.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control
point file, then legitimate values for the output field
would be from 0 to N+1 but not N+2.
A value of 0 or N+1 means that a new field is created; a
value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input control point file is replaced by this output field.
Note: You cannot replace a character field; you must
create a new one.
Default Value = 0, create a new field

FLDNAME

C*20

Name of the new field.
Default Value = Field name associated with the type of
input field chosen

DATAOUT

C*24

Name of the output data file.

MFDOUT

I

POLYID

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1
Segment I.D. of the polygon to use for blanking.
Default Value = 1

Process

47

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FILLTYPE

C*8

ZNON

R2003.12.0

R

Range Description and Default
Type of filling to perform.
Default Value = INSIDE
Options:
INSIDE

= Fill inside polygon

OUTSIDE

= Fill outside polygon

Null data value for the new field.
Default Value = Input field ZNON value

Process

48

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Blank Grid
Name

BLANK GRID

Alternate Name GR BK
Function

This process converts all grid intersections inside, or outside, of
polygons to a user-supplied value. The polygon file can be a contour,
vertex or fault file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

• FILEIN

Name of the input grid file.
0–5

C*24

MFDAUX

I

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

FILLTYPE

Range Description and Default

C*8

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the contour/vertex file that contains the contours
or polygons.
Range Options:
Contour, vertex or fault files

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the contour/vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
Type of filling to perform.
Default Value = INSIDE
Options:
INSIDE

= Fill inside polygons/contours with
FILLVAL

OUTSIDE = Fill outside polygons/contours with
FILLVAL
CLEVEL

R2003.12.0

= Fill inside contours with their contour level

Process

49

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

BOUNDARY C*8

Range Description and Default
Method of handling the edge of the polygon.
Default Value = OUTSIDE
Options:
INSIDE

= Edge of polygon is treated as inside the
polygon.

OUTSIDE = Edge of polygon is treated as outside the
polygon.

BNDTOLER

FILLVAL

SELECT

° POLYIDS

R2003.12.0

R

R

C*8

R

Boundary width tolerance. Grid nodes within this distance
of the boundary are considered on the boundary. If this
number is negative, a default is chosen based on a query
of your hardware and the precision of the data. Used if
FILLTYPE= INSIDE or OUTSIDE.
Default Value = -1.0
Constant fill value. Used if FILLTYPE = INSIDE or
OUTSIDE.
Default Value = 1.0E+30
Method of selecting polygons in the vertex file to use in
the integration task.
Note: The maximum number of polygons that can be
integrated at one time is 500.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= All polygons on the vertex file are used.

ONLY

= User can specify up to 40 polygon IDs (with
POLYIDS) to use.

EXCEPT

= User can specify up to 40 polygon IDs (with
POLYIDS) to ignore.

Array of up to 40 polygon IDs. Required if SELECT =
ONLY or EXCEPT.

Process

50

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Border
Name

BORDER

Alternate Name BRDR
Function

This process draws a border around the Area of Interest (AOI) of a
picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LINETYPE

C*8

LINEWGHT

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Map border line type.
Default Value = SOLID
Options:

1–8

SOLID

= Normal border lines

DASHED

= Dashed border lines

BOLD

= Bold border lines

Bold line width factor as a multiple of plain line widths.
Default Value = 2

Process

51

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Border Fill
Name

BORDER FILL

Alternate Name BDR FILL
Function

This process fills the map Area of Interest (AOI), offset area, or both
with color.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SELECT

C*16

COLOR

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Type of color coverage desired.
Default Value = OUTSIDE
Options:
INSIDE

= Color inside the map AOI

OUTSIDE

= Color outside the map AOI

INSIDE+OUTSIDE

= Color the entire map area

0–255 Color index to use for colorfilling map polygon.
Default Value = 13

Process

52

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Branch
Name

BRANCH

Alternate Name IF
Function

R2003.12.0

This process provides the capability of conditional jumps based on the
relationship of two values. Two values are compared; if their
relationship is the same as that specified, then the branch to the Process
and Use Number specified is executed.

Process

53

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Example
BRANCH:

VALUE1 = #97(1), RELATION = ’LT’, VALUE2 = 0.0001,
PROCESS = ’POSTSEISMIC’, USE = 20
/

C
SEIS INTERP THIN:
DATAIN
DATAOUT
SHPTINC
C
POST SEISMIC:
DATAIN
POSTMODE
LABLMODE

= ’PROJECTED SEISMIC’,
= ’INTERPOLATED SEISMIC’,
= #97(1)
/

MFDIN
MFDOUT

= ’INTERPOLATED SEISMIC’,
= ’ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE’,
= ’ENDPOINTS+LABLRATE’,

MFDIN
= 0,
POSTRATE = 5,
LABLRATE = 5,

.

.

= 0,
= 0,

.

SYMBSIZE = #95(1),

LABLSIZE =

ANGLE
= 90.0,
NAMESIZE = #95(1),
ZNON
= 0.10000000E+31

DASHLEN = 0.2,
NAMEANGL = 0.0,

#95(1),

C
BRANCH:

/

VALUE1 = #97(1), RELATION = ’GT’, VALUE2 = 0.0001,
PROCESS = ’BRANCH’, USE = 20
/

C
POST SEISMIC:20
DATAIN
= ’PROJECTED SEISMIC’,
POSTMODE = ’ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE’,
LABLMODE = ’ENDPOINTS+LABLRATE’,
.

.

MFDIN
= 0,
POSTRATE = 5,
LABLRATE = 5,

.

SYMBOL
= 14,
SYMBSIZE = #95(1),

LABLSIZE =

#95(1),
ANGLE
= 90.0,
NAMESIZE = #95(1),
ZNON
= 0.10000000E+31
C
C
Check
C
BRANCH:20

DASHLEN = 0.2,
NAMEANGL = 0.0,
/

for wells
VALUE1 = #20(2), RELATION = ’EQ’, VALUE2 = ’NO’,
PROCESS = ’BRANCH’, USE = 30
/

C

R2003.12.0

Process

54

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• VALUE1

Data
Type
I, R, or
C*

Range Description and Default
First of the pair of values to compare.
There are two ways to specify VALUE1.
1. As a constant value, ‘hardwired’ into the ZCL
command. For example,
VALUE1 = 123.456,...

2. As a value in a DATA BLOCK; this allows using
values generated at runtime in the comparison.
VALUE1 = #10(1),...

• RELATION

• VALUE2

C*4

I, R, or
C*

Relationship between VALUE1 and VALUE2.
Options:
LT

= Less than

LE

= Less than or equal

EQ

= Equal

GE

= Greater than or equal

GT

= Greater than

NE

= Not equal

Second of the pair of values to compare.
There are two ways to specify VALUE2.
1. As a constant value, ‘hardwired’ into the ZCL
command.
VALUE2 = 123.456,...

2. As a value in a DATA BLOCK; this allows using
values generated at runtime in the comparison.
VALUE2 = #10(1),...

• PROCESS
• USE

R2003.12.0

C*16
I

Name of the process to branch to.
Note: Process name may not have any blanks in it.
Use number of the process to branch to.

Process

55

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

C or !
Name

C

Name

!

Alternate Name
Function

These processes enable you to place comments in the ZCL command
stream.
The “!” can be placed anywhere on any line of the command stream.
All information following the “!” to the end of the line is considered
comments and is not used by ZCL.
ZCL commands that have been built into a ZCL macro have special
lines of instructions relating to parameters. The “!” process works as a
comment in these lines just as in regular ZCL.
The form of this command is “! comment text”, where comment text is
the text the ZCL command processor ignores. No Use Number, Back
Reference Number, or parameter is required.
Comments specified using the letter “C” are much more restricted. The
“C” must be in the first column of a line and followed by a space. The
“C” works only in “standard ZCL” and not in the special lines of
macros related to parameters, abstracts, or prompts. “C” comments
cannot be embedded in the parameters of a process, but must be placed
only between processes.
The advantage of the “C” comment over the “!” comment is that “C”
causes the comments to pass through to the ZCL output (either the
screen or a file). This is useful for documenting the actions of the ZCL
command stream.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

No parameters

Process

56

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

CGM File
Name

CGM FILE

Alternate Name SCALE PLOT
Function

This process plots a picture from a specified graphics file directly to a
plotter, to a CGM file for plotting at a later time, or both.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to plot.

PICNAME

C*80

Name of the picture to plot.
Default Value = Last picture in graphics file

NUMCOPY

I

ROTATE

CUTLINE

LGBMODE

R2003.12.0

C*4

C*12

C*4

Range Description and Default

1–100 Number of copies to plot.
Default Value = 1
Plot rotation.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES

= Rotate the plot

NO

= Do not rotate the plot

Cutline to draw around the plot.
Default Value = NO CUTLINE
Options:
CUTLINE

= Draw cutline

NO CUTLINE

= Do not draw cutline

Graphics features to plot.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= Plot all graphics features present on the picture

LIST

= Plot those graphics features supplied by the
LGBTYPES parameter

Process

57

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° LGBTYPES

I

SENDFILE

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to plot. Required
if LGBMODE = LIST. (For a list of graphics features, see
“Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes” in the Z-MAP
Plus Reference Manual.)
Send the picture to a CGM disk file.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES

= Send picture to CGM file

NO

= Do not send picture to CGM file

CGMFILE

C*80

Name of the output CGM file. The file name is used only
if SENDFILE = YES.
Default Value = temp.cgm, if SENDFILE = YES and
CGMFILE name is not specified

QUEPLOT

C*4

Queue the picture to the plotter.
Default Value = YES
Options:

° PLOTTER

R2003.12.0

C*4

Range Description and Default

C*32

YES

= Queue the picture to the plotter

NO

= Do not queue the picture to the plotter

Name of the plotter. Required if QUEPLOT = YES.

Process

58

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Colorbar
Name

COLORBAR

Alternate Name COLORSCALE
Function

This process draws a color scale on the picture. The color scale relates
a series of color indices to some quantity. The main use of this process
is to place a color scale bar on a map with colorfilled contours, but
almost any quantity variation can be shown in this way.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FILEIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

COLORBAR C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Name of the input file to provide a data range. If blank,
data range comes from parameters SURFZMIN and
SURFZMAX.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Colorbar placement.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= No colorbar

LEFT

= Left of map

RIGHT

= Right of map

ABOVE

= Above the map

BELOW

= Below the map

USER

= According to user-specified coordinates

XMINBAR

R

Minimum x coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

XMAXBAR

R

Maximum x coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
coordinates (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

YMINBAR

R

Minimum y coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
coordinates (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

Process

59

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

YMAXBAR

R

POSTCNTR

C*4

Range Description and Default
Maximum y coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
coordinates (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 10.0 in or 25.5 cm
Posting of contours on the colorbar.
Default Value = POST
Options:
POST

= Draw contours

OMIT

= Do not draw contours

NCONTOUR

I

0–255 Number of basic contour levels.
If NCONTOUR = 0, then all contours are being specified
as exceptions.
Default Value = None

CONMIN

R

Lowest contour level to draw. This is always the first
contour that is drawn.
Default Value = Computed from input data and other
criteria

CONMAX

R

Highest contour level to draw. This is always the last
contour that is drawn.
Default Value = Computed from input data and other
criteria

CONINT

R

Interval between successive contours.
Default Value = Computed from input data and other
criteria

LABLRATE

I

Rate to label contours. A value of N means to label every
Nth contour.
Default Value = 1

BOLDRATE

I

Rate for drawing bold line contours. A value of N means
to draw every Nth contour bold.
Default Value = 0

Process

60

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LINCLRTP

C*12

Range Description and Default
Method used to color contours and hence control the
meaning of parameter LINERATE.
Default Value = HIGHLIGHT
Options:
HIGHLIGHT

= Every LINERATEth contour is
colored in the HILTCOLR color with
all other contours being colored in the
STARTCLR color

INCREMENT

= For every LINERATEth contour, the
color of the contour is changed to the
next color in the color table

STARTCLR

I

0–255 Initial color index used to display contours.
If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT then with every
LINERATEth contour, the color of the contour is changed
to the next color in the color table.
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATEth
contour is colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other
contours being colored in the STARTCLR color.
Default Value = 4

HILTCOLR

I

0–255 Highlight color index. Used only if LINCLRTP =
HIGHLIGHT.
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATEth
contour is colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other
contours being colored in the STARTCLR color.
Default Value = 3

LINERATE

I

0–255 Every LINERATEth line, the contour color is changed.
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT then every LINERATEth
contour is colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other
contours being colored in the STARTCLR color.
If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT then with every
LINERATEth contour, the color of the contour is changed
to the next color in the color table.
Default Value = 1

COLORFIL

C*12

Colorfilling of the area between contours.
Default Value = NO COLORFILL
Options:
COLORFILLED

= Colorfill the contours

NO COLORFILL

= Do not colorfill the contours

Process

61

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FILLCOLR

I

0–255 Initial fill color index.
Default Value = 56

FILLRATE

I

1–256 For every FILLRATEth contour, the fill color index is
changed.
Default Value = 1

FILBELOW

FILABOVE

R2003.12.0

C*4

C*4

Range Description and Default

Colorfilling below the lowest contour.
The main use of FILBELOW and FILABOVE is to split
the contouring into two or more process steps.
Set FILBELOW to NO if describing the process handling
contours with values above the least contour to cover in
multiple process steps, but maintain the default value of
YES if describing the process that draws the minimum
contour value.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Colorfill below the lowest contour

NO

= Stop colorfilling at the lowest contour

Colorfilling above the highest contour.
The main use of FILBELOW and FILABOVE is to split
the contouring into two or more process steps.
Set FILABOVE to NO if describing the process handling
contours that have values below the highest contour to
cover in multiple process steps, but maintain a default
value of YES if describing the process that draws the
maximum contour value.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Colorfill above the highest contour

NO

= Stop colorfilling at the highest contour

NDECIMAL

I

Number of decimal places in label.
Default Value = 0

LABLSCLE

R

Contour label scaling factor.
Value of the contour label is:
LABLSCLE * (contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

62

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABLBIAS

R

Contour label bias.
Value of the contour label is:
LABLSCLE * (contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
Default Value = 0.0

LABLSIZE

R

Height of the characters in the contour label, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

LABLCOLR

I

BOLDWIDE

I

0–255 Color index specifying color of all contour labels.
Default Value = 9
2–8
Width of bold line in terms of normal line width.
Default Value = 2

FIELD

I

Field on the input data file to provide a data range. Not
needed if file is type GRID.
Default Value = First Z Value field on the input data file

SURFZMIN

R

Minimum value to show in the colorbar. Ignored if
FILEIN is not blank.

SURFZMAX

R

Maximum value to show in colorbar. Ignored if FILEIN is
not blank.

ELEVEL1

BOLD1

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

R

C*4

Array of up to 20 contour exception levels specifying
either a new contour level or identifying which existing
contour level is to have its parameters re-specified.
For a specific ELEVELN parameter, you can optionally
overwrite the defaults by specifying the appropriate
BOLDN, DASHN, ...BLANKN exception parameters.
Default Value = None
Array of up to 20 entries specifying whether to use a bold
line to draw the contour of the corresponding contour
exception level (ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, every BOLDRATEth ELEVEL1
line is bold.
Default Value = None
Options:
YES

= Bold the exception contour.

NO

= Do not bold the exception contour.

Process

63

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABEL1

C*4

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 20 entries specifying whether to label the
contour of the corresponding contour exception level
(ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, every LABLRATEth ELEVEL1
line is labeled.
Default Value = None
Options:
YES

= Label the exception contour.

NO

= Do not label exception contour.

LCOLOR1

I

Array of up to 20 color indices of the color to draw the
contour line of the corresponding contour exception level
(ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, every LINERATEth ELEVEL1
line, the contour color is changed to the next color in the
color table.
Default Value = None

FNEWCL1

I

Array of up to 20 color indices of the fill color to use
below the contour level specified by ELEVEL1.
If no value is specified, the default fill color for that
contour level is used, based on FILLCOLR and
FILLRATE
Default Value = None

Process

64

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Color Polygons
Name

COLOR POLYGONS

Alternate Name COLOR POLY
Function

This process colorfills polygons defined in a vertex file.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• VERTICES

C*24

Vertex Name of input vertex file.
file

MFDIN

I

0–5

° COLOR

I

0–255 Color index for colorfilling polygons. Required if
CLRMODE = COLOR NUMBER.
Default Value = 1

CLRMODE

C*12

COORDSYS C*12

R2003.12.0

Number of the MFD that contains the vertex file.
Default Value = 0

Method of obtaining the color index.
Default Value = COLOR NUMBER
Options:
COLOR
FIELD

= Color is obtained from the color field
on the vertex file

COLOR
NUMBER

= Color is specified by COLOR
parameter

Coordinate system for the polygon vertices.
Default Value = ENGINEERING
Options:
ENGINEERING

= Vertices are specified in
engineering coordinates.

PLOTTER

= Vertices are specified in plotter
coordinates (in or cm).

Process

65

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Color Table
Name

COLOR TABLE

Alternate Name CLR TBL
Function

This process reads or writes a color table.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• READWRIT C*8

• DISKFILE

R2003.12.0

C*80

Range Description and Default
Action to perform on the color table.
Options:
READ

= Read a color table from an external disk file
into the current system

WRITE

= Write current system color table to external
disk file

Name of the external color table disk file that is being
read in or written to.

Process

66

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Compute Cell Value
Name

COMPUTE CELL VALUE

Alternate Name CELL CALCULATE
Function

This process performs the calculation of RESIN cell values from grid
files. The output cell table contains one field more than the input cell
table. This new field incorporates the results of the operation.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• CELLFILE

C*24

MFDOUT

I

GRIDS
MFDGRDS

FAULTS

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Name of the input RESIN cell table file.
The output RESIN cell table file has essentially the same
name, except that the version number is incremented or
added.
0–5

C*24
I

Array of up to 10 input grid file names.
0–5

C*24

MFDFLTS

I

FLDNAMS

C*24

Number of the MFD to contain the cell table file.
Default Value = 1

Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contain the input
grids.
Each MFD number is associated with the grid in the
GRIDS list occupying the same sequential list position.
The second and later MFD numbers default to the first
MFD number if they are not supplied.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 10 input fault file names.

0–5

Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contain the input
fault files.
Each MFD number is associated with the fault file in the
FAULTS list occupying the same sequential list position.
The second and later MFD numbers default to the first
MFD number if they are not supplied.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 10 field names for the output fields.
Default Value = Use the first 3 characters of the
METHODS option plus the first 12 characters
of the GRIDS name.

Process

67

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

METHODS

C*20

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 10 entries that contain the specific
calculation method for each grid.
Default Value = AVE
Options:
AVE

= Average value of those grid nodes
inside the lattice cell.

MAX

= Maximum value of the grid nodes
inside the lattice cell.

MIN

= Minimum value of the grid nodes
inside the lattice cell.

ALL THREE

= Apply all three methods AVE, MAX,
and MIN, putting results on three
output fields.

VOLUMETRIC

= Volume over the lattice cell divided by
the area of the lattice cell.

BACK INTERPOLATION

R2003.12.0

= Interpolation of the value
of the grid surface at the
center of the Lattice cell.

Process

68

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Contour
Name

CONTOUR

Alternate Name CNTR
Function

This process draws contours, adding them to a previously created
picture.
Contour data is optionally stored in a new contour file. The contours
are generated from a grid or a previously created contour file.
Controls for the contouring process include: starting contour and
interval or specific contour levels, fault or polygon constraints,
boldness of the lines, annotation size and frequency, color filling
(purchasable option), and defining the window for contouring.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

MFDIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

AUXFILE

C*24

MFDAUX

I

CONMIN

R

Name of the input grid or contour file.
Range Options:
Grid or contour files
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid or
contour file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the auxiliary constraint file.
Default Value = Blank
Range Options:
Fault or vertex files

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the fault or polygon
file.
Default Value = 0
Lowest contour level to draw. This is always the first
contour that is drawn. This applies if NCONTOUR is not
a positive value.
Default Value = For a grid file, a round number near the
grid’s minimum value
or
For a contour file, the minimum contour value
in that file

Process

69

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONMAX

R

The upper bound for the highest contour level to draw.
This applies if NCONTOUR is equal to zero.
Default Value = For a grid file, a round number near the
grid’s maximum value
or
For a contour file, the maximum contour value
in that file

CONINT

R

Interval between successive contours. Used if
NCONTOUR is less than or equal to zero.
Default Value = For a grid file, a number to yield
approximately 20 contour levels over the grid
range
or
For a contour file, the contour interval of that
file

NCONTOUR

I

° CONVALS

R2003.12.0

R

Range Description and Default

–255 Number of contour levels.
through A positive value for NCONTOUR signifies that levels to
255
contour are specified by parameter CONVALS.
A zero value for NCONTOUR signifies that contouring
starts at the level specified by parameter CONMIN and
continues to increment the contour level by the value of
CONINT until reaching the surface limit or CONMAX,
or 255 contour levels, whichever happens first.
A negative value for NCONTOUR is similar to a zero
value with respect to using CONMIN and CONINT, but
differs in that, at most, the absolute value of
NCONTOUR levels are contoured.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 9 specific contour levels. Required if
NCONTOUR is positive.

Process

70

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONSMTH

C*12

Range Description and Default
Smoothness of the contour line. All contours are made up
of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
lines, the rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
Default Value = MEDIUM
Options:

DRAWCNTR C*20

COARSEST

= Coarsest point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 grid interval.

COARSE

= Coarse point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 2 the grid interval.

MEDIUM

= Medium point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 4 the grid interval.

FINE

= Fine point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 8 the grid interval.

VERY FINE

= Very fine point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 16 the grid interval.

Drawing of contours on the picture.
Default Value = CONTOURS DRAWN
Options:
CONTOURS NOT
DRAWN

= Contours not drawn on
picture

CONTOURS DRAWN

= Contours drawn on picture

Note: The constraining faults are always drawn on the
map regardless of the value for this parameter.

R2003.12.0

FILEOUT

C*24

Name of the output contour file. If no name is specified,
then contours will not be output.
Default Value = Blank

MFDOUT

I

LABLRATE

I

Rate to label contours. A value of N means to label every
Nth contour.
Default Value = 1

BOLDRATE

I

Rate for drawing bold line contours. A value of N means
to draw every Nth contour bold.
Default Value = 0

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output contour file.
Default Value = 1

Process

71

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

HACHRATE

I

Rate for drawing hachured line contours. A value of N
means to draw every Nth line hachured.
Default Value = 0

DASHRATE

I

Rate for drawing dashed line contours. A value of N
means to draw every Nth contour dashed.
Default Value = 0

LABLDIS1

R

Distance from start of the contour to first label, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

LABLDISX

R

Distance between successive labels on a given contour, in
plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 10.0 in or 25.5 cm

LABLSIZE

R

Height of the characters in the contour label, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

NDECIMAL

I

Number of decimal places in label.
Default Value = 0

LABLSCLE

R

Label annotated on the contour is the value of the contour
times LABLSCLE.
Default Value = 1.0

LABLBIAS

R

Label annotated on the contour is the value of the contour
plus LABLBIAS.
Default Value = 0.0

COLORFIL

C*12

Colorfilling of the area between contours.
Default Value = NO COLORFILL
Options:
COLORFILLED

= Colorfill the contours

NO COLORFILL

= Do not colorfill the contours

Process

72

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

COLORCON C*12

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Overlaying of contours on the colorfill map.
Default Value = OVERLAY
Options:
OVERLAY

= Overlay contour lines on top of
polygons

NO OVERLAY

= Contours do not overlay colorfill

STARTCLR

I

0–255 Starting color index (number from the color table) for
colorfilled contours.
The color of this index number (STARTCLR) is used for
the areas with values below the lowest contour level. The
color of the next higher index number (STARTCLR + 1)
is used for the area between the lowest contour and the
next higher contour.
This continues through the area with values above the
highest contour level, which is assigned the color of index
number STARTCLR + 1 + the number of contour levels.
Default Value = 56

FILLRATE

I

Every FILLRATEth contour level, the fill color is
changed.
Default Value = 1

LINECLR

I

LINERATE

I

Every LINERATEth contour level, the contour color is
changed.
If LINERATE = 0, then all lines are LINECLR.
Default Value = 0

RMINWIN

I

Minimum row of the grid to display. This specifies the
bottom of the window.
Default Value = 1

RMAXWIN

I

Maximum row of the grid to display. This specifies the
top of the window.
Default Value = Last row of the grid

CMINWIN

I

Minimum column of the grid to display. This specifies the
left side of the window.
Default Value = 1

0–255 Initial color index used for displaying contours.
Default Value = 3

Process

73

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

CMAXWIN

I

Maximum column of the grid to display. This specifies
the right side of the window.
Default Value = Last column in the grid

XMINWIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of window.
Default Value = From the AOI of the input grid/contour
file

XMAXWIN

R

Maximum x coordinate of window.
Default Value = From the AOI of the input grid/contour
file

YMINWIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of window.
Default Value = From the AOI of the input grid/contour
file

YMAXWIN

R

Maximum y coordinate of window.
Default Value = From the AOI of the input grid/contour
file

Process

74

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Contour Cell Table
Name

CONTOUR CELL TABLE

Alternate Name CNTR CELL TABLE
Function

This process produces a contour file from a given RESIN cell table file
and a particular field of that cell table.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• CELLFILE

C*24

MFDCELL
• INFLD

R2003.12.0

I
I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input RESIN cell table file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the cell table.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the field to contour.

NCONTOUR

I

0–255 Number of basic contour levels.
If NCONTOUR = 0, then all contours are being specified
as exceptions.
Default Value = Computed from CONMIN, CONMAX,
CONINT and grid

CONMIN

R

Lowest contour level to draw. This is always the first
contour that is drawn.
Default Value = Computed from the range of the grid

CONMAX

R

Highest contour level to draw. This is always the last
contour that is drawn.
Default Value = Computed from the range of the grid

CONINT

R

Interval between successive contours.
Default Value = Computed from NCONTOUR,
CONMIN, CONMAX and grid

Process

75

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONSMTH

C*12

Range Description and Default
Smoothness of the contour line. All contours are made up
of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
lines, the coarser the contour line looks.
Note: If faults are used, CONSMTH cannot be linear
(COARSEST).
Default Value = FINE
Options:
COARSEST

= Coarsest point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 grid interval.

COARSE

= Coarse point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 2 the grid interval.

MEDIUM

= Medium point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 4 the grid interval.

FINE

= Fine point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 8 the grid interval.

VERY FINE

= Very fine point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 16 the grid interval.

LABLSIZE

R

Height of the characters in the contour label, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

NDECIMAL

I

Number of decimal places in label.
Default Value = 0

LABLRATE

I

Rate to label contours. A value of N means to label every
Nth contour.
Default Value = 1

LABLSCLE

R

Contour label scaling factor.
Value of the contour label is:
LABLSCLE * (contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
Default Value = 1.0

LABLBIAS

R

Contour label bias.
Value of the contour label is:
LABLSCLE * (contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

76

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABLDIS1

R

Distance from start of the contour to first label, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.54 cm

LABLDISX

R

Distance between successive labels on a given contour, in
plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 10.0 in or 25.4 cm

BOLDRATE

I

Rate for drawing bold line contours. A value of N means
to draw every Nth contour bold.
Default Value = 0

HACHRATE

I

Rate for drawing hachured line contours. A value of N
means to draw every Nth line hachured.
Default Value = 0

DASHRATE

I

Rate for drawing dashed line contours. A value of N
means to draw every Nth contour dashed.
Default Value = 0

COLORFIL

C*12

COLORCON C*12

FILLCOLR

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default

Colorfilling of the area between contours.
Default Value = NO COLORFILL
Options:
COLORFILLED

= Colorfill the contours

NO COLORFILL

= Do not colorfill the contours

Overlaying of contours on the colorfill map.
Default Value = OVERLAY
Options:
OVERLAY

= Overlay contour lines on top of
polygons

NO OVERLAY

= Contours do not overlay colorfill

0–255 Initial fill color index.
Default Value = 18

Process

77

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

COLORBAR C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Colorbar placement. Used if COLORFIL =
COLORFILLED.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= No colorbar

LEFT

= Left of map

RIGHT

= Right of map

ABOVE

= Above the map

BELOW

= Below the map

USER

= According to user defined coordinates

XMINBAR

R

Minimum x coordinate of the window, in plotter
coordinates (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

XMAXBAR

R

Maximum x coordinate of the window, in plotter
coordinates (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

YMINBAR

R

YMAXBAR

R

Minimum y coordinate of the window, in plotter
coordinates (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm
Maximum y coordinate of the window, in plotter
coordinates (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 10.0 in or 25.5 cm

Process

78

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Contour Gridding
Name

CONTOUR GRIDDING

Alternate Name CTOG
Function

This process builds a grid from a digitized contour file. The algorithm
is designed to take advantage of the special nature of digitized
contours. During the first pass of the gridding process, the contour data
is separated into individual contours. (These can be checked to be sure
correct contours are used.) These contours can then be resampled in the
E-W, N-S, NE-SW, and NW-SE directions.
The intersection of these four sample directions are centered on the
grid nodes (the sampling data can be used as a data file). Averages of
the four sample directions are used as node values for the first gridding
pass. Flexing ties the grid to the original contours and optionally to a
set of point data values (wells).
Controls include: fault constraints, gridding area, grid increment,
flexing algorithm, smoothing, and upper and lower tolerances for
constraining flexing.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• CONTOURS C*24
MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

FAULTS
MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Name of the input digitized contour file to grid.
0–5

Field number of the z field in the digitized contour file.
Used if CNTRTYPE = MARKER or NO MARKER.
Default Value = First Z Value field

C*24
I

Number of the MFD that contains the input contour file.
Default Value = 0

Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0

Process

79

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DIGCHECK

C*16

° GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

° CHECKFIL

C*24

MFDCHECK

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Treatment of contours created during first pass of the
gridding process.
Default Value = CREATE GRID
Options:
SAVE+CREATE

= Interpreted contours saved, grid
created.

SAVE
CONTOURS

= Interpreted contours saved, grid
not created.

CREATE GRID

= Interpreted contours not saved,
grid created.

Name of the output grid file. Required if DIGCHECK =
SAVE+CREATE or CREATE GRID.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output digitization check file. Required if
DIGCHECK = SAVE+CREATE or SAVE CONTOURS.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output check file.
Default Value = 1

° SEPARATE

R

If consecutive points having the same contour value are
more than SEPARATE apart, the contour is assumed to
end at the first point while a new contour starts at the
second point. Specified in user units.
Required if GINC is specified; other parameters affected
are CONNECT and EXTRAP.
Default Value = 10 * grid increment

° CONNECT

R

If the last point on an input line is in CONNECT of the
first point, the contour is made to close on itself. Specified
in user units.
Required if GINC is specified; other parameters affected
are SEPARATE and EXTRAP.
Default Value = 2 * grid increment

Process

80

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• CNTRTYPE

C*16

Range Description and Default
Format of the input contour file. (See the table “How
Contour Files are Structured” in Appendix D of the
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.)
Options:
MARKER+MARKER

= Marker, marker (terminator
value) followed by contour
value, flag, followed by x,y
points.

MARKER+CONTOUR = Marker (terminator value),
contour followed by x,y
points.
CONTOUR+MARKER = Contour, marker (terminator
value) followed by x,y points.
MARKER

= Marker (terminator value),
dummy, dummy followed by
x,y,z points.

NO MARKER

= No marker (terminator value),
x,y,z points. The contour lines
are distinguished by changes
in z value. Required if the
input file is of type DATA.

XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum x value of the data

XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum x value of the data

YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum y value of the data

YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum y value of the data

GINC

R

Gridding interval in the x and y directions.
If this parameter is specified then other parameters
affected are SEPARATE, CONNECT, and EXTRAP.
Default Value = Largest round number that is less than
( XMAX – XMIN ) × ( contour interval )
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------( contour maximum – contour minimum )

R2003.12.0

Process

81

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Range Description and Default

ZMIN

R

Minimum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = –1.0E+30

ZMAX

R

Maximum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

ZNON

R

Null data value for the output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

C*12

Type of search directions to use.
Default Value = HORZ+VERT+45
Options:

NSEARCH

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

HORZ+VERT

= Horizontal and vertical

HORZ+VERT+45

= Horizontal, vertical, 45 degrees,
and –45 degrees

REACH

R

Radius of the data collection circle.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * grid diagonal

° EXTRAP

R

Distance to extrapolate past the data.
Required if GINC is specified; other parameters affected
are CONNECT and SEPARATE.
Default Value = 2 * grid increment

CTOGINTR

C*24

Name of output intersection points file. Points are
generated where the contours intersect the grid lines.
If no name is specified, intersection points are not saved.
Default Value = Blank

MFDINTR

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the intersection point file.
Used if CTOGINTR is specified.
Default Value = 1

Process

82

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FLEXTYPE

C*12

Range Description and Default
Type of grid flexing algorithm to use.
Default Value = BIHARMONIC
Options:
BIHARMONIC

= Biharmonic flexing

LAPLACIAN

= Laplacian flexing

COMBINATION

= Combination of Biharmonic and
Laplacian

NONE

= No flexing is desired

CUTOFF

R

Termination criterion for grid flexing.
This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates if the change is less than
CUTOFF and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Default Value = 0.25

NUMPASS

I

Maximum number of flexing passes.
If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10

FLEXCTRL

C*16

Termination method for grid flexing.
Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS

= Flexing is performed
NUMPASS times without
regard to CUTOFF

FLEX<=NUMPASS

= Flexing is performed a
maximum of NUMPASS times;
a grid curvature change of less
than CUTOFF terminates
flexing

Process

83

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SMOOTH

R

0.0–1.0 Control on trade-off between smoothing and accuracy in
grid flexing. Used if FLEXINTR = points and/or filtering
with point elevation file.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original data,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original data.
Default Value = 0.2

C*12

Usage of intersection points in the flexing process.
Default Value = POINTS
Options:

FLEXINTR

FLEXCNTR

R2003.12.0

C*16

Range Description and Default

NO POINTS

= Intersection points not used in flexing
process

POINTS

= Intersection points are used in flexing
process; used if FLEXTYPE is not equal
to NONE

Usage of contour constraints in the flexing process.
Contour constraints ensure that grid values always remain
between the same two contour levels. Not available if
intersection or point elevation files are used.
Default Value = NO CONSTRAINTS
Options:
NO CONSTRAINTS

= Contour constraints are not
used

CONSTRAINTS

= Contour constraints are used

UPBIAS

R

Value to add to the input grid to form the upper limit grid.
Default Value = 0.0

LOBIAS

R

Negative value to add to the input grid to form the lower
limit grid.
Default Value = 0.0

UPSCALE

R

Value to multiply the input grid to form the upper limit
grid.
Default Value = 1.0

LOSCALE

R

Negative value to multiply the input grid to form the
lower limit grid.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

84

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PROFILES

C*24

Range Description and Default
Name of profile dataset.
Default Value = Blank

MFDPROFS

I

PROFFLD

I

Field number of the z field that contains the data to use in
the profile dataset file. Used if a profile file is used.
Default Value = First Z Value field

DATAIN

C*24

Name of the input control point file to use in flexing
process. If no name is specified, then a point elevation file
is not used.
Default Value = Blank

MFDDATA

I

PNTFLD

I

0–5

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the output profile data
file.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the z field on the input control point file
to use if flexing. Used if a control point file is used.
Default Value = First Z Value field

Process

85

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Contour New
Name

CONTOUR NEW

Alternate Name PROFILE CONTOUR
Function

This process performs profile contouring.
Profile contouring generates annotated contours and colorfill polygons
from an input grid and optional auxiliary files such as profile and fault
polygon files. Profile contouring supports more contour annotation
options than does standard contouring.
While profile contouring supports contouring of grid models with
opaque faults, it was designed specifically to contour grid models with
profile lines and/or profile faults. Consequently, contours generated
with opaque faults may not be equivalent in quality to those produced
by standard contouring.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

I

PROFILES

C*24

MFDPROF

I

POLYGONS C*24

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of input discontinuity fault file for contour
generation.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input profiles file with z values marking
discontinuity in gradient.
Range Options:
Fault or vertex files

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input profile file.
Default Value = 0
Name of input vertex file that contains polygons to which
contours are clipped for display.

Process

86

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDPOLY

I

POLYCLIP

R2003.12.0

0–5

C*8

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

CONSMTH

Range Description and Default

C*12

Number of the MFD that contains the input clipping
polygon file.
Default Value = 0
Type of clipping of contours to polygons. Used if clipping
file POLYGONS is specified.
Default Value = OUTSIDE
Options:
OUTSIDE

= Clip contours outside polygons

INSIDE

= Clip contours inside polygons

Name of the output contour file. If no name is specified,
then contours are not output.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Smoothness of the contour line. All contours are made up
of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
lines, the rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
Note: If faults are used, CONSMTH cannot be linear
(COARSEST).
Default Value = MEDIUM
Options:
COARSEST

= Coarsest point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 grid interval.

COARSE

= Coarse point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 2 the grid interval.

MEDIUM

= Medium point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 4 the grid interval.

FINE

= Fine point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 8 the grid interval.

VERY FINE

= Very fine point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1 ⁄ 16 the grid interval.

Process

87

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

COLORBAR C*8

Range Description and Default
Colorbar placement. Used if COLORFIL =
COLORFILLED.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= No colorbar

LEFT

= Left of map

RIGHT

= Right of map

ABOVE

= Above the map

BELOW

= Below the map

USER

= According to user-specified coordinates

XMINBAR

R

Minimum x coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

XMAXBAR

R

Maximum x coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

YMINBAR

R

Minimum y coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

YMAXBAR

R

Maximum y coordinate of the colorbar area, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if COLORBAR = USER.
Default Value = 10.0 in or 25.5 cm

WINDOW

C*12

Rectangular area limitation (window) for contouring.
The rectangular window can be specified either with
XMINWIN, XMAXWIN, YMINWIN and YMAXWIN
which is adjusted to nearby row-column coordinates of
the grid, or with CMINWIN, CMAXWIN, RMINWIN,
and RMAXWIN, but these may not be mixed!
Default Value = NO WINDOW
Options:
WINDOW

= Contouring is in a specified area limit

NO WINDOW = Contouring is not in a specified area
limit

R2003.12.0

Process

88

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Range Description and Default

° XMINWIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the window, in engineering
units. Required if WINDOW = WINDOW and
XMAXWIN, YMINWIN and YMAXWIN must be
specified.

° XMAXWIN

R

Maximum x coordinate of the window, in engineering
units. Required if WINDOW = WINDOW and
XMINWIN, YMINWIN and YMAXWIN must be
specified.

° YMINWIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the window, in engineering
units. Required if WINDOW = WINDOW and
XMAXWIN, XMINWIN and YMAXWIN must be
specified.

° YMAXWIN

R

Maximum y coordinate of the window, in engineering
units. Required if WINDOW = WINDOW and
XMAXWIN, XMINWIN and YMINWIN must be
specified.

° CMINWIN

I

Minimum grid column (the left-most column) of the
windowed region. Required if WINDOW = WINDOW
and CMAXWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN must be
specified.

° CMAXWIN

I

Maximum grid column (the right-most column) of the
windowed region. Required if WINDOW = WINDOW
and CMINWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN must be
specified.

° RMINWIN

I

Top grid row of the windowed region. Required if
WINDOW = WINDOW and CMAXWIN, CMINWIN,
and RMAXWIN must be specified.

° RMAXWIN

I

Bottom grid row of the windowed region. Required if
WINDOW = WINDOW and CMAXWIN, CMINWIN,
and RMINWIN must be specified.

POSTCNTR

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*4

Posting of contours on the picture.
Default Value = POST
Options:
POST

= Draw contours

OMIT

= Do not draw contours

Process

89

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

NCONTOUR

I

0–255 Number of basic contour levels.
If NCONTOUR = 0, then all contours are being specified
as exceptions.
Default Value = None

CONMIN

R

Lowest contour level to draw. This is always the first
contour that is drawn.
Default Value = Computed from input data and other
criteria

CONMAX

R

Highest contour level to draw. This is always the last
contour that is drawn.
Default Value = Computed from input data and other
criteria

CONINT

R

Interval between successive contours.
Default Value = Computed from input data and other
criteria

LABLRATE

I

Rate to label contours. A value of N means to label every
Nth contour.
Default Value = 1

BOLDRATE

I

Rate for drawing bold line contours. A value of N means
to draw every Nth contour bold.
Default Value = 0

HACHRATE

I

Rate for drawing hachured line contours. A value of N
means to draw every Nth line hachured.
Default Value = 0

DASHRATE

I

Rate for drawing dashed line contours. A value of N
means to draw every Nth contour dashed.
Default Value = 0

Process

90

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LINCLRTP

C*12

Range Description and Default
Method used to color contours and hence control the
meaning of parameter LINERATE.
Default Value = HIGHLIGHT
Options:
HIGHLIGHT

= Every LINERATEth contour is
colored in the HILTCOLR color with
all other contours being colored in the
STARTCLR color

INCREMENT

= Every LINERATEth contour, the color
of the contour changes to the next
color in the color table

STARTCLR

I

0–255 Initial color index used for displaying contours. The color
of subsequent contours depends on LINCLRTP.
Default Value = 3

HILTCOLR

I

0–255 Highlight color index; used only if LINCLRTP =
HIGHLIGHT.
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATEth
contour is colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other
contours being colored in the STARTCLR color.
Default Value = 4

LINERATE

I

0–255 Every LINERATEth line, the contour color is changed.
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATEth
contour is colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other
contours being colored in the STARTCLR color.
If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT then with every
LINERATEth contour, the color of the contour is changed
to the next color in the color table.
Default Value = 1

COLORFIL

C*12

Colorfilling of the area between contours.
Default Value = NO COLORFILL
Options:
COLORFILLED

= Colorfill the contours

NO COLORFILL

= Do not colorfill the contours

Process

91

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CFILCOMP

C*8

CNTRFILL

R2003.12.0

C*4

Range Description and Default
Compression of colorfill polygons to improve display
time.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No joining of polygons. Graphics files
are large and display of colorfill
contours is slow.

MINIMAL

= Easy-case joining of polygons.
Graphics files are significantly smaller
and display times significantly
improved compared with NONE.

PARTIAL

= More polygons joined, graphics file
smaller and display faster than with
MINIMAL.

MAXIMAL

= A few more polygons are joined than
with PARTIAL, graphics file slightly
smaller, but no significant improvement
in display time.

Use of contour lines to generate colorfill polygons.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Colorfill polygons are drawn between contours.

NO

= Colorfill polygons are colored by average cell
value rather than by position between contours.

FILLCOLR

I

0–255 Initial fill color index.
Default Value = 56

FILLRATE

I

1–256 For every FILLRATEth contour, the fill color index is
changed to the next color index in the color table.
Default Value = 1

Process

92

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FILBELOW

C*4

FILABOVE

R2003.12.0

C*4

Range Description and Default
Colorfilling below the lowest contour.
The main use of FILBELOW and FILABOVE is to split
the contouring into two or more process steps.
Set FILBELOW to NO if describing the process handling
contours with values above the least contour to cover in
multiple process steps, but maintain the default value of
YES if describing the process that draws the minimum
contour value.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Colorfill below the lowest contour

NO

= Stop colorfilling at the lowest contour

Colorfilling above the highest contour.
The main use of FILBELOW and FILABOVE is to split
the contouring into two or more process steps.
Set FILABOVE to NO if describing the process handling
contours that have values below the highest contour to
cover in multiple process steps, but maintain a default
value of YES if describing the process that draws the
maximum contour value.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Colorfill above the highest contour

NO

= Stop colorfilling at the highest contour

BLNKRATE

I

Rate for allowing contours to gradient blank in steep
areas. For positive BLNKRATE, every BLNKRATEth
contour is subject to gradient blanking in steep regions.
Default Value = 0, No contours are gradient blanked

BLNKDIST

R

Minimum allowed distance between contours subject to
gradient blanking, in plotter units (in or cm). Contour
trace is not plotted if the distance between that contour
and its neighbors is less than BLNKDIST.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

NDECIMAL

I

Number of decimal places in label.
Default Value = 0

Process

93

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LABLSCLE

R

Contour label scaling factor.
Value of the contour label is:
LABLSCLE * (contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
Default Value = 1.0

LABLBIAS

R

Contour label bias.
Value of the contour label is:
LABLSCLE * (contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
Default Value = 0.0

LABLSIZE

R

Height of the characters in the contour label, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

LABLDIS1

R

Distance from start of the contour to first label, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

LABLDISX

R

Distance between successive labels on a given contour, in
plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 10.0 in or 25.5 cm

LABLCOLR

I

HACHLEN

R

Length of the hachure ticks, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

HACHGAP

R

Distance between successive hachure ticks on hachured
lines, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.5 in or 1.5 cm

DASHLEN

R

Length of the solid portion of a dashed line, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

GAPLEN

R

Length of the gap portion of a dashed line, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

BOLDWIDE

I

0–255 Color index specifying color of all contour labels.
Default Value = 9

2–8

Width of bold line in terms of normal line width.
Default Value = 2

Process

94

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ELEVEL1

R

BOLD1

DASH1

HACH1

R2003.12.0

C*4

C*4

C*4

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 20 contour exception levels specifying
either a new contour level or identifying which existing
contour level is to have its parameters re-specified.
For a specific ELEVELn parameter, you can optionally
overwrite the defaults by specifying the appropriate
BOLDn, DASHn, ...BLANKn exception parameters.
Default Value = None
Array of up to 20 entries specifying whether to use a bold
line to draw the contour of the corresponding contour
exception level (ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, the line weight as determined by
BOLDRATE is used.
Default Value = None
Options:
YES

= Bold the exception contour.

NO

= Do not bold the exception contour.

Array of up to 20 entries specifying whether to use a
dashed line to draw the contour of the corresponding
contour exception level (ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, the line type as determined by
DASHRATE is used.
Default Value = None
Options:
YES

= Draw the exception contour as a dashed line

NO

= Draw the exception contour as a solid line

Array of up to 20 entries specifying whether to use a
hachured line to draw the contour of the corresponding
contour exception level (ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, the line type as determined by
HACHRATE is used.
Default Value = None
Options:
YES

= Draw the exception contour with hachuring

NO

= Do not draw exception contour with hachuring

Process

95

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABEL1

C*4

Array of up to 20 entries specifying whether to label the
contour of the corresponding contour exception level
(ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, labeling as determined by
LABLRATE is used.
Default Value = None
Options:
YES

= Label the exception contour.

NO

= Do not label exception contour.

LCOLOR1

I

Array of up to 20 color indices of the color to draw the
contour line of the corresponding contour exception level
(ELEVEL1).
If no value is specified, the contour color as determined
by LINERATE is used.
Default Value = None

FNEWCL1

I

Array of up to 20 color indices of the fill color to use
below the contour level specified by the corresponding
contour exception level specified by ELEVEL1.
If no value is specified, the fill color for that contour level
is used, based on FILLCOLR and FILLRATE.
Default Value = None

BLANK1

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*4

Array of up to 20 entries specifying whether the
corresponding contour exception level (ELEVL1) is
subject to gradient blanking in steep regions.
The gradient blanking control specified by BLANK1
controls the blanking parameter associated with the
contour level specified by ELEVEL1, etc.
If no value is specified for BLANK1, the gradient
blanking parameter determined by BLNKRATE controls
whether that contour is allowed to undergo gradient
blanking.
Default Value = None
Options:
YES

= Subject the exception contour to gradient
blanking

NO

= Do not subject the exception contour to
gradient blanking

Process

96

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Copy Picture
Name

COPY PICTURE

Alternate Name COPY
Function

This process copies one or more graphic segments from one picture to
another (new) picture.

Notes

The TOPICT must not exist.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FROMZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains FROMPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

FROMPICT

C*80

Name of the picture used as the source for all or some of
the copied graphic features.
Default Value = Current picture specified by the
PICTURE Process

TOZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file that will contain TOPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

• TOPICT

C*80

Name of the picture to which one or more graphics
features will be copied. This picture must not exist; a new
picture is created, assigning this name to it.

DIVIDE

C*20

Method of handling the division of graphics features from
the input picture.
Default Value = MAINTAIN DIVISIONS
Options:
SINGLE FEATURE

= Copy input features into one
feature on output picture

MAINTAIN
DIVISIONS

= Preserve feature distinction
during copy

Process

97

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LGBTYPES

I

Range Description and Default
≤1000 Array of up to 40 graphics feature types to copy.
One code is assigned to each feature type, unless all
available types are to copy, in which case set LGBTYPES
to a negative number. For a complete list of available
feature codes, see “Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes”
in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = Output all features
Range Options:
1–1000

= Output that feature

0

= Ignore

<0

= Output all features

Process

98

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Cross Section
Name

CROSS SECTION

Alternate Name XSEC
Function

This is the old cross section process. We recommend using CROSS
SECTION NEW for better results and easier use.
This process generates a cross section of a faulted or unfaulted grid.
The cross section created is drawn to the current picture, and control
point data can be optionally posted on the section. The section created
can also be output to a file.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN
MFDGRID
• LINEIN

I

Name of the input grid file.
0–5

C*24
I

FAULTIN

C*24

DATAIN

Range Description and Default

C*24

MFDLINE

MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input vertex file that contains the
cross-section baseline.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the baseline vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

C*24

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the control point file if one is posted.
Default Value = Blank

MFDDATA

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0

LINEXFLD

I

Field number for X field in baseline vertex file.
Default Value = First X field

LINEYFLD

I

Field number for Y field in baseline vertex file.
Default Value = First Y field

Process

99

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LINELFLD

I

Field number for Line Number field in baseline vertex
file.
Default Value = First Line Number field

FALTXFLD

I

Field number for fault X field in baseline vertex file.
Default Value = First X field

FALTYFLD

I

Field number for fault Y field in baseline vertex file.
Default Value = First Y field

FALTLFLD

I

Field number for fault Segment ID field in baseline vertex
file.
Default Value = First fault Segment ID field

DATAXFLD

I

Field number for the X field in the control point file.
Default Value = First X field

DATAYFLD

I

Field number for Y field in the control point file.
Default Value = First Y field

DATAZFLD

I

Field number for z field in the control point file.
Default Value = First Z Value field

LINENUM

R

Line number in the baseline vertex file to use for
cross-section display.
Default Value = 1.0

XSECNAME C*80

Name of cross section. If blank, no label is made.
Default Value = Blank

BANDWDT
H

Width of a band around the baseline inside which control
points will be posted. This band arcs around the end of the
line, used as a radius.
Default Value = 0.0

R

Process

100

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SAMPRATE

C*12

XSECOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

NAMEHGHT

R

LABLFORM C*12

LABLTYPE

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
Density to use for sampling the grid. The density
determines how smooth the grid profile line looks.
Default Value = MEDIUM
Options:
COARSE

= 1 sample point between grid row/column
lines

MEDIUM

= 4 sample points between grid row/
column lines

FINE

= 8 sample points between grid row/
column lines

VERY
FINE

= 16 sample points between grid row/
column lines

Name of output cross-section file; if blank, no file is
output.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output cross-section
file.
Default Value = 1
Height of cross-section name label in plotter units
(in or cm). Used if XSECNAME is not blank.
Default Value = 0.25 in or 0.65 cm
Orientation of control point labels.
Default Value = VERTICAL
Options:
HORIZONTAL

= Parallel to the baseline

VERTICAL

= Perpendicular to the baseline

Usage of field names to label posted control points.
Default Value = NO NAME
Options:
NAME

= Control points are labeled with field
names as well as field values

NO NAME

= Control points are labeled with field
values only

Process

101

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LABLHGHT

R

Height of labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

LABLFLD

I

Field number of the field whose values will be posted.
Default Value = First Z Value field

Process

102

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Cross Section New
Name

CROSS SECTION NEW

Alternate Name XSEC NEW
Function

This process draws cross-section profiles along a specified baseline.
Multiple grid and fault files can be used to create this display.
This CROSS SECTION NEW Process contains many more
capabilities than the original CROSS SECTION Process. It is
therefore, the recommended process.
If more than 10 grids are desired on one section, call this process more
than once.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

GRIDIN

C*24

MFDGRD

LINEIN

MFDLINE
FAULTS

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 10 input grid files to use if generating the
cross section. The grids can be listed in any order.
Default Value = Files used in PICTURE Process for
PICTYPE = CROSS-SECTION
0–5

C*24

I
C*24

Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contain the input
grids, listed in the same position as in GRIDIN.
The second and later MFD numbers default to the first
MFD number if they are not supplied.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input vertex file that contains the
cross-section baseline.
Default Value = File used in PICTURE Process if
PICTYPE = CROSS-SECTION

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the baseline vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 10 fault files to use if drawing a profile
through the corresponding grid in GRIDIN, listed in the
same position as in GRIDIN.
If the same fault file is to use for all grids, its name must
be entered once for each grid.
Default Value = Blank

Process

103

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDFLT

I

LINENUM

R

XSECNM

C*40

0–5

Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contain the input
fault files, listed in the same position as in FAULTS.
Default Value = 0
Line number in the baseline vertex file to use for
cross-section display.
Default Value = 1.0
Array of up to 10 labels to print at the right of the
cross-section display and adjacent to the associated grid,
listed in the same position as the associated grid in
GRIDIN.
If a label is not desired for one of the grids, then its
position is left blank.
Default Value = Blank

NAMEHGHT

R

Height of all grid name labels (XSECNMs), in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.25 in or 0.65 cm

SAMPDIST

R

Sampling in cross-sections can be specified as a distance
as well as a rate. The number you specify is the sampling
distance in engineering units. To use SAMPDIST, you
must set the SAMPRATE to USER DEFINED.

SAMPRATE C*12

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Density to use for sampling the grid. The density
determines how smooth the grid profile line looks.
Grid cells are modeled linearly if SAMPRATE =
COARSE and no faults have been specified for the grid.
In all other cases, non-linear cell modeling is used.
Default Value = MEDIUM
Options:
COARSE

= 1 sample point between grid row/column
lines

MEDIUM

= 4 sample points between grid row/
column lines

FINE

= 8 sample points between grid row/
column lines

VERY
FINE

= 16 sample points between grid row/
column lines

USER
DEFINED

= Allows you to set the SAMPDIST
parameter.

Process

104

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

XSECOT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 10 cross-section files that contain the x,y,z
sample points created for the associated grid when
making the cross section, listed in the same position as in
GRIDIN.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs to contain the output
cross-section files, listed in the same position as in
XSECOT.
Default Value = 1

Process

105

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

D
Name

D

Alternate Name
Function

This process activates Subroutine Interface Library (SIL) debugging,
printing the input parameters to all SIL subroutines called by ZCL at
execution time to run the various ZCL processes.
Typically, the D process is only used if you are trying to track down a
difficult problem; for standard ZCL debugging, use ECHO (see
page 151).
To turn on the SIL debug process, enter a D in column one and a space
in column 2 in front of the processes for which you want debug
information printed. To turn off the debug process, again enter a D in
column 1 and a space in column 2.

Example
!
! Get Data Statistics on the topography Z-FIELD.
!
DATA STATISTICS:
DATAIN = ’SKYLINE DATA’, MFDIN =
1,
INFLD = 3
/
!
! Grid Skyline Topography using LS gridding.
!
! Turn ON debug.
!
D
POINT GRIDDING: DATAIN =’SKYLINE DATA’, INFLD = 3,
METHOD =’LEAST SQUARES’,
XMIN = 47800, XMAX = 50000,
YMIN = 207000, YMAX = 208500,
GRIDOUT =’SKYLINE TOPOGRAPHY GRID’,
MFDOUT = 1
/
!
! Turn OFF debug.
D

Parameters

R2003.12.0

No parameters

Process

106

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Data Block
Name

DATA BLOCK

Alternate Name DATA
Function

This process allows the user to specify values that can be referenced as
parameter values in any process that follows the DATA BLOCK
Process. The same values can be referenced by several different
process parameters. The value types can be integer, decimal, or
alphanumeric. The DATA BLOCK Use Number distinguishes one set
of variables from the next if several DATA BLOCK processes are
used.
The DATA BLOCK Process is usually used with the LOOP Process.
The parameters that vary from one execution to the next in the loop get
their values from the DATA BLOCK Process. Using the DATA
BLOCK Process, a string of values, one for each pass through the loop,
are entered as parameters.

Notes

For more examples and discussions of the DATA BLOCK and LOOP
Processes, see “Additional Information” on page 17.

Example

For a process to retrieve the KKth data entry from use MM of a DATA
BLOCK, the appropriate field of the process is coded as #MM(KK).
DATA BLOCK: 010,000

HOWMANY = 2,
DATATYPE = ’REAL’,
DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 376.852, 242.51

/
SINGLE DATA OPS: 010,000

PARAM = #10(2),... /

The example substitutes 242.51 for PARAM in the SINGLE DATA
OPS Process.
Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• HOWMANY

I

Range Description and Default
1–97

Number of data items specified.
This count does not include the first three descriptive
parameters (HOWMANY, DATATYPE, or DATASIZE).
It is the number of data items (VALUEs) for this process.

Process

107

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• DATATYPE C*8

• DATASIZE

R2003.12.0

I

Type of data items, VALUEs. All data items in this
process must be of this type.
Options:

1–80

INTEGER

= Integer Data

REAL

= Floating point data (decimal)

TEXT

= Text data (alphanumeric)

Length of a value. Required if DATATYPE = TEXT.
If DATATYPE = REAL, then DATASIZE should be set
to 1 for single precision numbers and set to 2 for double
precision numbers.
Default Value = If DATATYPE = TEXT, then this is the
maximum number of characters in any VALUE
or
1, for DATATYPE = INTEGER
or
1, for DATATYPE = REAL
Range Options:
1

for DATATYPE = INTEGER

1–2

for DATATYPE = REAL

1–80

for DATATYPE = TEXT

Process

108

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
VALUE

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 97 entries, all of the same type (all real, all
integer, or all text).
The values in this parameter can be assigned as output
values from another ZCL process. For example, by
specifying DNUM in the DATA STATISTICS Process,
the values of the data block are filled with the output of
the DATA STATISTICS Process, beginning with
VALUE, VALUE2, VALUE3, etc.
Alternatively, these values can be specified by one of the
two ways described on page 6, or by using the DATA
BLOCK LOAD Process.
Default Value = 0, for INTEGER
or
0.0, for REAL
or
Blank, for TEXT
Data Type Options:
I

for integer data

R

for floating point data (decimal)

C*DATASIZE

R2003.12.0

for text data (alphanumeric)

Process

109

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Data Block Load
Name

DATA BLOCK LOAD

Alternate Name LOAD DBLK
Function

This process allows the user to write the values of user-selected fields
of a user-selected input file to a ZCL DATA BLOCK.
The DATA BLOCK LOAD Process is used in conjunction with the
DATA BLOCK Process. DATA BLOCK LOAD does the work of the
VALUE parameter in the DATA BLOCK Process. The difference is
that DATA BLOCK LOAD uses values from an input file to load into
the DATA BLOCK instead of using VALUE.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

Name of input file.

MFDIN

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

DBREAL

I

Use number of the output REAL Data Block.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is nonzero, the specified DATA BLOCK exists, and the
specified DATA BLOCK is of DATATYPE = REAL.
Default Value = 0

° REALFLDS

I

Array of up to 20 field numbers to write to the output
REAL Data Block. The fields must be numeric fields.
Required if DBREAL is non-zero.

DBINTG

I

Use number of the output INTEGER Data Block.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is nonzero, the specified DATA BLOCK exists, and the
specified DATA BLOCK is of DATATYPE =
INTEGER.
Default Value = 0

Process

110

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° INTGFLDS

I

Array of up to 20 field numbers to write to the output
INTEGER Data Block. The fields must be numeric fields.
Required if DBINTG is non-zero.
Note: Before being written to the output data block, field
values are converted to integer with a FIX (i.e.,
truncation) operation. If an alternate
float-to-integer conversion is desired (i.e.,
ROUND, FLOOR, or CEIL), the user must first
use the SINGLE DATA OPS Process to convert
the field value.

DBTEXT

I

Use number of the output CHARACTER Data Block.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is
non-zero, the specified DATA BLOCK exists and the
specified DATA BLOCK is of DATATYPE = TEXT.
Default Value = 0

° TEXTFLDS

I

Array of up to 20 field numbers to write to the output
TEXT Data Block. Required if DBTEXT is non-zero.
The fields can be either character or numeric fields. If a
numeric field is listed, then the value is first converted to
a character string and then written to the output TEXT
Data Block.

FORMATS

C*20

Array of up to 20 FORTRAN formats, one for each field
to write to the output TEXT Data Block, (e.g.,
FORMATS = ′4A4′, ′F15.7′). These formats are useful in
converting numeric values to character string prior to
output. This parameter is only applicable to TEXT data
block loading.
Default Value = Print format of field in input file

Process

111

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Data Block Print
Name

DATA BLOCK PRINT

Alternate Name DB PRINT
Function

This process prints the contents of the specified DATA BLOCK onto
the screen.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DBPRINT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
Use number of the input DATA BLOCK. The DATA
BLOCK must already exist.
Default Value = 0

Process

112

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Data Block Utility
Name

DATA BLOCK UTILITY

Alternate Name CHANGE DATA BLOCK
Function

This process lets you perform mathematical (algebraic) manipulation
of one or more of the DATA BLOCK entries.
Do not try to store results in DATA BLOCKs that have been written to
by another task; store output to a different DATA BLOCK. Accessing
values from existing DATA BLOCKs is allowed, but attempting to
overwrite them is not.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

DNUMIN

I

Use number of the input DATA BLOCK from which the
values for A and B are taken.
Default Value = 0

• DNUMOUT

I

Use number of the output DATA BLOCK used for
storing the RESULT. The output must be greater than
zero.

• RESULT

I

Index of the VALUE location in which the result of the
operation is stored in the output DATA BLOCK.

° PARAM

R

Value of the scalar parameter. Conditionally required
depending on the value of OPNAME.
If OPNAME is:

R2003.12.0

PARAM is:

ADDPARAM

bias value added to AINDEX

SUBPARAM

bias value subtracted from AINDEX

MULPARAM

bias value used for multiplication

DIVPARAM

divisor value for division of AINDEX

PARAMSUB

minuend value for subtraction

PARAMDIV

dividend value for division

CLIPUP

value used for lower threshold

CLIPDOWN

value used for upper threshold

ROUND

value used for round off unit

Process

113

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° AINDEX

° BINDEX

R2003.12.0

I

I

Range Description and Default
Index of the A VALUE location in the input DATA
BLOCK. Conditionally required depending on the value
of OPNAME.
Index of the B VALUE location in the input DATA
BLOCK. Conditionally required depending on the value
of OPNAME.

Process

114

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
C*8

Range Description and Default
Name of operation to perform.
Options:
LOAD

= Load the value of PARAM into the
RESULT location.

LOADNEG

= Load the value of PARAM times –1
into the RESULT location.

LOADRECP

= Load the reciprocal (1/value of
PARAM) into the RESULT
location.

ADDPARAM

= Add the value of PARAM to the
value in the AINDEX location.

SUBPARAM

= Subtract the value of PARAM from
the value in the AINDEX location.

MULPARAM

= Multiply the value of PARAM by
the value in the AINDEX location.

DIVPARAM

= Divide the value in the AINDEX
location by the value of PARAM.

PARAMSUB

= Subtract the value in the AINDEX
location from the value of PARAM.

PARAMDIV

= Divide the value of PARAM by the
value in the AINDEX location.

CLIPUP

= Output minimum of the values of
PARAM and AINDEX location.

CLIPDOWN

= Output maximum of the values of
PARAM and AINDEX location.

ADD

= Add the values in AINDEX and
BINDEX locations.

SUBTRACT

= Subtract the value in the BINDEX
location from the value in the
AINDEX location.

MULTIPLY

= Multiply the values in AINDEX and
BINDEX locations.

DIVIDE

= Divide the value in the AINDEX
location by the value in the
BINDEX location.

Process

115

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME
(cont’d)

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*8

Options (cont’d):
LN

= Output natural logarithm of value in the
AINDEX location.

EXP

= Perform natural exponentiation (raise E to
the value in AINDEX location).

SIN

= Output sine of value in the AINDEX
location, input value in radians.

COS

= Output cosine of value in the AINDEX
location, input value in radians.

TAN

= Output tangent of value in the AINDEX
location, input value in radians.

ATAN

= Output arctangent of value in the
AINDEX location, input value in radians.

LOG10

= Output common logarithm of value in the
AINDEX location.

MINIMUM

= Output minimum of the values in
AINDEX and BINDEX locations.

SQROOT

= Output square root of value in the
AINDEX location.

FIX

= Convert the floating point (real) value in
the AINDEX location to integer value.

FLOAT

= Convert the integer value in the AINDEX
location to floating point (real) value.

ABS

= Output absolute value of value in the
AINDEX location.

ROUND

= Round off the value in the AINDEX
location to the nearest value of PARAM.

FLOOR

= Output the largest integer that is less than
or equal to the value in the AINDEX
location.

CEIL

= Output the smallest integer that is greater
than or equal to the value in the AINDEX
location.

TRANSFER = Copy the value in the AINDEX location of
Data Block DNUMIN into the RESULT
location of Data Block DNUMOUT,
provided that the Data Blocks’
DATASIZE and DATATYPE match.

R2003.12.0

Process

116

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Data Enumeration
Name

DATA ENUMERATION

Alternate Name COUNT DATA
Function

This process counts records in the entire file in Segment ID ranges, and
creates Segment ID fields from key fields.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

Name of the input file to enumerate.
Range Options:
All files but grids

MFDIN

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

INFLDS

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers to use as key fields for
creating a Segment ID field or enumerating the data.
Default Value = 0, count the number of records

SEGIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID output field.
Default Value = 0, append to the end of the record

SEGIDNAM C*20

Name for output Segment ID field.
Default Value = SEG ID

PTSEQFLD

Field number of the Point Sequencing output field.
Default Value = 0, append to the end of the record

I

PTSEQNAM C*20

Name for the output Point Sequencing field.
Default Value = SEQUENCE

FILEOUT

C*24

Name of the output data file.

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

Process

117

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Data Statistics
Name

DATA STATISTICS

Alternate Name DATA STATS
Function

This process gathers and displays statistics describing a particular
numeric field in a specified control point file. Both the X and Y fields
and the field to examine must be present in this file. This process
writes to a real, single precision data block.

Example
DATA FILE:
CREATED:
AT:

19PROFILES
21 OCT87
09:15

CONTROL POINT STATISTICS
FOR CONTROL POINT FILE ’19 PROFILES’
WITH SPECIFIC ATTENTION TO FIELD NUMBER3
NAMED ’MINED SURFACE’
Number of Control Points in the file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Control Points in the Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Points with a ZNON value in field number 3 . . . . . . . .

First control point
)
Last control point
)
XMIN =
YMIN =

=
=
=

721
721
0

X-Value
= (1.9221000E+06,

Y-Value
6.2763000E+04,

Data-Value
-1.0000001E+04

= (1.9429000E+06,

4.0948000E+04,

-9.2176250E+03

1.9221000E+06XMAX =
4.0948000E+04YMAX =

1.9429000E+06
6.3917000E+04

XRANGE =
YRANGE =

2.0800000E+04
2.2969000E+04

DATA MIN =
-1.0079811E+04
DATA MAX =
-8.8736377E+03
DATA RANGE =1.2061729E+03
MEAN DATA VALUE =
-9.2690068E+03
RMS DATAVALUE =9.2744727E+03
STANDARD DEVIATION OF DATA =
3.1835828E+02
THE ZNON (NULL VALUE) FOR THIS FIELD =
1.0000000E+30

R2003.12.0

Process

118

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

You can instruct ZCL to write the same data statistics into a ZCL
DATA BLOCK so other processes can have access to this information.
This is done by using the ZCL DATA BLOCK Process to create a
DATA BLOCK that contains 22 REAL locations. The following
example shows how this is done in a ZCL command stream:
DATA: 15,00
/

HOWMANY = 22,

DATA STATISTICS: 123,00

DATATYPE = ’REAL’, DATASIZE = 1

DATAIN = ’19 PROFILES’,
MFDIN = 1,
INFLD = 3,
DNUM = 15
/

By specifying DNUM = 15 in the DATA STATISTICS Process, the
user has specified that DATA BLOCK 15 be filled in the following
manner:
Location

R2003.12.0

Information Present

1

Number of data points in file

2

Number of data points in window defined by parameter record

3

Number of data points with null value

4

The x value of first data point

5

The y value of first data point

6

Data-value of first data point

7

The x value of last data point

8

The y value of last data point

9

Data-value of last data point

10

Minimum x value

11

Maximum x value

12

The x range (maximum – minimum)

13

Minimum y value

14

Maximum y value

15

The y range (maximum – minimum)

16

Minimum Data-value

17

Maximum Data-value

18

Data range (maximum – minimum)

Process

119

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Location

Information Present

19

Mean Data-value

20

Root Mean Square (RMS) data value

21

Standard Deviation of data values

22

Null data value (ZNON)

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• DATAIN

C*24

Name of the input control point file.

MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

Field number of the data in the control point file for which
statistics are generated. This field must not be a character
field.
Default Value = First Z Value field

DNUM

I

Use number of the output DATA BLOCK. The DATA
BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is non-zero and the
specified DATA BLOCK exists.
Default Value = 0

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0

Process

120

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Delete File
Name

DELETE FILE

Alternate Name DEL F
Function

This process marks a file for deletion from an MFD. Memory is still
allocated, but the file is unavailable for use. If the MFD is compressed,
then the file is removed.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• FILENAME

C*24

MFD

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the file on an MFD or scratch MFD to delete.
0–5

Number of MFD that contains the file to delete.
Default Value = 0

Process

121

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Delete Picture
Name

DELETE PICTURE

Alternate Name PC DL
Function

This process marks a picture for deletion from a graphics file. Memory
is still allocated, but the picture is unavailable for use. When the
graphics file is compressed, the picture is removed.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to
delete.

• PICNAME

C*80

Name of the picture to delete.

Process

122

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Dev Well Post
Name

DEV WELL POST

Alternate Name D WEL POST
Function

Post a deviated well dataset.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Example

All Defaults taken

z value and well symbol posted at well top
Well symbol posted at well bottoms

z value, well symbol, and platform name posted
at well top
z value and well track name posted at well bottoms

R2003.12.0

z value and well symbol posted at well top
z value posted at well bottoms

Platform name posted at well top
z value, well symbol, well name, and net to gross
posted at well bottoms

Process

123

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

Name of input file to post.
Range Options:
Data, fault, vertex and deviated well files

MFDIN

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

NUMFLDT

I

0–12

Number of fields to post at the well top location.
Default Value = 0

NUMFLDB

I

0–12

Number of fields to post at the well bottom location.
Note: The file must be a deviated well file in order to
post fields at the bottom location.
Default Value = 0

XFLD

I

Field number of X field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of Y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

SEGIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field.
Used if FILEIN is a deviated well file; otherwise this field
is optional.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

WELLFLD

I

Field number of the Well Name or Platform Identifier
field.
Used if FILEIN is a deviated well file; otherwise this field
is optional.
Default Value = First Well Name or Platform Identifier
field

CLRTFLD

I

Field number for the Color field used to determine color
for the top symbol. Used if CLRMODET = COLOR
FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field

CLRBFLD

I

Field number for the Color field used to determine color
for the bottom symbol. Used if CLRMODEB = COLOR
FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field

Process

124

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SYMTFLD

I

Field number for the symbol code field used to determine
the symbol to post at the well top location. Used if
PSTSYMT = SYMBOL FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

SYMBFLD

I

Field number for the symbol code field used to determine
the symbol to post at the well bottom location. Used if
PSTSYMB = SYMBOL FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

ZCLRTFLD

I

Field number for the z field to use to vary the color of the
top symbol. Used if CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

ZCLRBFLD

I

Field number for the z field to use to vary the color of the
bottom symbol. Used if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

TOPFLDS

I

Array of up to 12 fields to post at the well top location.
Can be of any types.
Default Value = None

BOTFLDS

I

Array of up to 12 fields to post at the well bottom
location. Can be of any types.
Default Value = None

LINETYPE

C*12

LINECLR

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default

Type of line to use. The specified line connects all points
with the same Segment ID. For a deviated well file, this is
the well trace.
Default Value = SOLID
Options:
SOLID

= Plain solid line

SINGLE DASH

= Dash, gap pattern

DOUBLE
DASH

= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2 pattern

TRIPLE DASH

= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2, dash 3,
gap 3 pattern

HACHURE

= Hachure pattern

OMIT

= Do not draw line

0–255 Color of line connecting points with same Segment ID.
Default Value = 2

Process

125

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LINEWGHT

I

1–8

Multiple of normal line width for the line connecting
points with same Segment ID.
Default Value = 1

SYMNUMT

I

Number of the symbol to post at top location. Used if
PSTSYMT = SYMBOL NUMBER.
Default Value = 1

SYMNUMB

I

Number of the symbol to post at bottom location. Used if
PSTSYMB = SYMBOL NUMBER.
Default Value = 1

PSTRATET

I

Post rate for top symbols. For example, if PSTRATET =
5, every 5th top location is posted.
Default Value = 1

PSTRATEB

I

Post rate for bottom symbols. For example, if
PSTRATEB = 5, every 5th bottom location is posted.
Default Value = 1

LBLRATET

I

Label rate for top symbols. For example, if LBLRATET =
5, every 5th posted top location is labeled.
Default Value = 1

LBLRATEB

I

Label rate for bottom symbols. For example, if
LBLRATEB = 5, every 5th posted bottom location is
labeled.
Default Value = 1

SYMCLRT

I

0–255 Color index for symbols at top locations. Used if
CLRMODET = SYMBOL COLOR.
Default Value = 6

SYMCLRB

I

0–255 Color index for symbols at bottom locations. Used if
CLRMODEB = SYMBOL COLOR.
Default Value = 5

CLRLEVT

I

0–50

Number of color levels to use to post top symbols. Used if
CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 0

CLRLEVB

I

0–50

Number of color levels to use to post bottom symbols.
Used if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 0

Process

126

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

STRTCLRT

I

0–255 Starting color index to use to post top symbols. Used if
CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 17

STRTCLRB

I

0–255 Starting color index to use to post bottom symbols. Used
if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 17

LBLCLRT

I

0–255 Color index to use for top location labels.
Default Value = 6

LBLCLRB

I

0–255 Color index to use for bottom location labels.
Default Value = 5

DASHLEN1

R

Length of the first dash in dash pattern for line that
connects points with same Segment ID. Used if
LINETYPE = SINGLE DASH, DOUBLE DASH or
TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

DASHLEN2

R

Length of the second dash in dash pattern for line that
connects points with same Segment ID. Used if
LINETYPE = DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.09 in or 0.25 cm

DASHLEN3

R

Length of the third dash in dash pattern for line that
connects points with same Segment ID. Used if
LINETYPE = TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.11 in or 0.30 cm

GAPLEN1

R

Length of the first gap in dash pattern for line that
connects points with same Segment ID. Used if
LINETYPE = SINGLE DASH, DOUBLE DASH or
TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

GAPLEN2

R

Length of the second gap in dash pattern for line that
connects points with same Segment ID. Used if
LINETYPE = DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.09 in or 0.25 cm

GAPLEN3

R

Length of the third gap in dash pattern for line that
connects points with same Segment ID. Used if
LINETYPE = TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.11 in or 0.30 cm

Process

127

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

HACHLEN

R

Length of the hachure lines for line that connects points
with same Segment ID. Used if LINETYPE =
HACHURE.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

HACHGAP

R

Length of the space between the hachure lines for line that
connects points with same Segment ID. Used if
LINETYPE = HACHURE.
Default Value = 0.10 in or 0.25 cm

HACHDIR

C*8

Direction of the hachure lines relative to the direction of
the line. Used if LINETYPE = HACHURE.
Default Value = LEFT
Options:
LEFT

= Draw hachures on relative left side of line

RIGHT

= Draw hachures on relative right side of line

SYMSIZET

R

Size of symbol posted at top locations.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

SYMSIZEB

R

Size of symbol posted at bottom locations.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

PSTSYMT

C*16

Method for determining symbol to post at top locations.
Default Value = SYMBOL NUMBER
Options:
SYMBOL
NUMBER

= Use symbol number given by
SYMNUMT

SYMBOL FIELD

= Use Symbol Code field given by
SYMTFLD

OMIT

= Do not post symbol

Process

128

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PSTSYMB

C*16

CLRMODET C*12

CLRMODEB C*12

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Method for determining symbol to post at bottom
locations.
Default Value = SYMBOL NUMBER
Options:
SYMBOL
NUMBER

= Use symbol number given by
SYMNUMB

SYMBOL FIELD

= Use Symbol Code field given by
SYMBFLD

OMIT

= Do not post symbol

Method for defining the color of the symbol at top
locations.
Default Value = SYMBOL COLOR
Options:
SYMBOL
COLOR

= Use SYMCLRT

COLOR FIELD

= Use field given by CLRTFLD

Z-FIELD

= Vary color based on z field given by
ZCLRTFLD

Method for defining the color of the symbol at bottom
locations.
Default Value = SYMBOL COLOR
Options:
SYMBOL
COLOR

= Use SYMCLRB

COLOR FIELD

= Use field given by CLRBFLD

Z-FIELD

= Vary color based on z field given
by ZCLRBFLD

° ZINCT

R

Increment to use to default the z top color table values.
Required if CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.

° ZINCB

R

Increment to use to default the z bottom color table
values. Required if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.

Process

129

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FONTT

C*8

Range Description and Default
Font to use for the labels posted at the top locations. For
examples, see “Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
PLAIN

FONTB

R2003.12.0

C*8

LINCLFLD

I

LINEMODE

C*12

Font to use for the labels posted at the bottom locations.
For examples, see “Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options: Same as FONTT
Field number for the color field to use when drawing the
line connecting points with the same Segment ID. Used if
LINEMODE = COLOR FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field
Method for defining line color.
Default Value = LINE COLOR
Options:
LINE COLOR

= Use color index given by LINECLR

COLOR
FIELD

= Use field given by LINCLFLD

NDECTS

I

Array of up to 12 values for the number of decimals to
post for the fields posted at top locations, listed in same
position as corresponding field in TOPFLDS.
Default Value = 0

NDECBS

I

Array of up to 12 values for the number of decimals to
post for the fields posted at bottom locations, listed in
same position as corresponding field in BOTFLDS.
Default Value = 0

Process

130

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LOCATET

C*8

LOCATEB

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 12 options for posting the fields at top
locations, listed in same position as corresponding field in
TOPFLDS.
Default Value = ABOVE
Options:
ABOVE

= Above the top symbol

BELOW

= Below the top symbol

RIGHT

= Right of the top symbol

LEFT

= Left of the top symbol

CENTERED

= At the well location; normally this is
used only if no symbol is posted

Array of up to 12 options for posting the fields at bottom
locations, listed in same position as corresponding field in
BOTFLDS.
Default Value = ABOVE
Options:
BELOW

= Below the bottom symbol

ABOVE

= Above the bottom symbol

RIGHT

= Right of the bottom symbol

LEFT

= Left of the bottom symbol

CENTERED

= At the well location; normally this is
used only if no symbol is posted

ZNONTS

R

Array of up to 12 null data values for the fields to post at
top locations, listed in same position as corresponding
field in TOPFLDS.
Default Value = ZNON value for the field

ZNONBS

R

Array of up to 12 null data values for the fields to post at
bottom locations, listed in same position as corresponding
field in BOTFLDS.
Default Value = ZNON value for the field

LBLZTS

R

Array of up to 12 label sizes, in plotter units (in or cm),
for the fields to post at the top locations, listed in same
position as corresponding field in TOPFLDS.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

Process

131

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LBLZBS

R

Array of up to 12 label sizes, in plotter units (in or cm),
for the fields to post at the bottom locations, listed in same
position as corresponding field in BOTFLDS.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

ZNONCLRT

R

Null data value for the z field to use to vary the top
symbol color. Used if CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = ZNON value for the field

ZNONCLRB

R

Null data value for the z field to use to vary the bottom
symbol color. Used if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = ZNON value for the field

ZCLRTS

R

Array of up to 50 maximum z values for color indices to
use when posting top symbols. Used if CLRMODET =
Z-FIELD.
Top color table defaults are calculated from CLRLEVT,
ZINCT, and the data range for the Z-field being used.
Default Value = If ZINCT is not specified, the data range
is divided into CLRLEVT equal intervals
or
If ZINCT is specified, then the first entry is
(data minimum + ZINCT), the second entry is
(data minimum + 2*ZINCT), etc.

ZCLRBS

R

Array of up to 50 maximum z values for color indices to
use when posting bottom symbols. Used if CLRMODEB
= Z-FIELD.
Top color table defaults are calculated from CLRLEVB,
ZINCB, and the data range for the z field being used.
Default Value = If ZINCB is not specified the data range
is divided into CLRLEVB equal intervals
or
If ZINCB is specified, then the first entry is
(data minimum + ZINCB), the second entry is
(data minimum + 2*ZINCB), etc.

Process

132

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Dip Symbolization
Name

DIP SYMBOLIZATION

Alternate Name DIP SYMBOL
Function

This process generates polylines that, if posted with hachures on a
map, mark the downdip sides of the expanded fault polygons from the
ZCL process POINT GRID PLUS.

Notes

Either a Heave field or a Dip Angle field is needed to generate the dip
symbol traces. If both types of fields exist on the file, and if either both
fields are specified or neither field is specified, then the Heave field
takes precedence.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FAULTS

MFDFAULT

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

SYMBOLS

C*24

MFDSYML

I

EXPFTOUT

C*24

MFDEXPFT

I

DEPUNITS

C*16

Name of the input center-line fault file that contains
vertical separation (throw) data and fault gap (heave) or
dip angle data.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input center-line
fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output vertex file that contains polylines to
post with hachures for down dip symbolization.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the output vertex file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output fault file that contains raw, unclipped
expanded fault polygons.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the output unclipped
expanded fault polygons.
Default Value = 1
Direction that depth is measured.
Default Value = POSITIVE DEPTH
Options:
POSITIVE DEPTH

= Depth measured downward
(e.g., Depth or Seismic Time)

NEGATIVE DEPTH = Depth measured upward (e.g.,
Elevation)

R2003.12.0

Process

133

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DIPUNIT

C*8

REPORT

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
Units used to measure dip angle.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:
DEGREES

= Measure the dip angle in degrees

RADIANS

= Measure the dip angle in radians

GRADS

= Measure the dip angle in grads

Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No report

PARTIAL

= Summary report

FULL

= Full report

FALTXFLD

I

Field number of the X field in the input center-line fault
file.
Default Value = First X field

FALTYFLD

I

Field number of the Y field in the input center-line fault
file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input
center-line fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

FLTTHRFD

I

Field number of the Vertical Separation (Throw) field in
the input center-line fault file.
Default Value = First Throw field.

FLTHEVDF

I

Field number of the Fault Gap (Heave) field in the input
center- line fault file.
Default Value = First Heave field

FLTDIPFD

I

Field number of the Dip Angle field in the input
center-line fault file.
Default Value = First Dip Angle field

Process

134

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Dip Vector Plot
Name

DIP VECTOR PLOT

Alternate Name GRAD VECTOR PLOT
Function

This process posts a vector plot using a control point file or grid files as
input.
Using a control point file as input, dip azimuths and magnitudes are
specified fields in the file. Using grid files as input, a dip azimuth grid
and a dip magnitude grid are specified. Vector arrows on the plot can
be varied in color according to their magnitude values.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DIPSRCE

C*4

° DATAIN
MFDDATA

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Input source of dip angles and magnitudes.
Default Value = GRID
Options:

C*24
I

° GRIDIN1

C*24

MFDIN1

I

° GRIDIN2

C*24

MFDIN2

I

XFLD

I

DATA

= Create dip vector plot from a data file

GRID

= Create dip vector plot from grid files

Input data file. Required if DIPSRCE = DATA.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0
Input magnitude grid file. Required if DIPSRCE = GRID.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input magnitude
grid file.
Default Value = 0
Input azimuth grid file. Required if DIPSRCE = GRID.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input azimuth grid
file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the X field in the input data file. Used if
DIPSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = First X field

Process

135

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

YFLD

I

Field number of the Y field in the input data file. Used if
DIPSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = First Y field

DXFLD

I

Field number of the gradient (DZ/DX) field if
DEGORRAD = GRADIENT, or of the dip angle field if
DEGORRAD = DEGREES or RADIANS. Used if
DIPSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = First DZ/DX field if DEGORRAD =
GRADIENT
or
First dip angle field if DEGORRAD =
DEGREES or RADIANS

DYFLD

I

Field number of the gradient (DZ/DY) field if
DEGORRAD = GRADIENT, or of the dip azimuth angle
field if DEGORRAD = DEGREES or RADIANS. Used if
DIPSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = First DZ/DY field if DEGORRAD =
GRADIENT
or
First dip azimuth angle field if DEGORRAD =
DEGREES or RADIANS

DEGORRAD C*8

CLIPVECT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*16

Method of measuring azimuth or use of gradient
information.
Default Value = RADIANS
Options:
DEGREES

= Dip azimuth measured in degrees

RADIANS

= Dip azimuth measured in radians

GRADIENT

= Gradient information (can be used only
if DIPSRCE = DATA)

Clip vectors against the AOI border.
Default Value = CLIP VECTOR
Options:
NO CLIP VECTOR

= Do not clip vectors against AOI
border

CLIP VECTOR

= Clip vectors against AOI border

Process

136

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

POSTSYMB C*4

Range Description and Default
Post SYMBOL at locations with arrows less than
specified minimum ARROWMIN.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
POST

= Post symbol at locations with arrows less than
minimum

OMIT

= Do not post symbol at locations with arrows
less than minimum

SYMBOL

I

Symbol to post at less than specified minimum arrow.
Default Value = 14

ARROWMIN

R

Minimum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Default Value = MIN(0.05, ARROWMAX*0.5)

ARROWMAX

R

Maximum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = If DIPSRCE = DATA, then
XLENGTH × YLENGTH
0.5 --------------------------------------------------------------NUMPOINTS

or
If DIPSRCE = GRID where GXINC and
GYINC pertain to GRIDIN1, then
0.5

MAGMAX

R2003.12.0

R

GXINC GYINC 
-, -----------------------* MIN  ----------------------
XMAPSC YMAPSC

Upper limit on dip magnitude. All magnitudes above this
value are mapped to ARROWMAX.
Default Value = If DIPSRCE = DATA and DEGORRAD
= GRADIENT, then XMAX 2 + YMAX 2
or
If DIPSRCE = DATA and DEGORRAD =
DEGREES or RADIANS, then TAN (XMAX)
or
If DIPSRCE = GRID, then
GZMAX of GRIDIN1

Process

137

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CLRMODE

C*16

STARTCLR

I

NUMCLR

I

INCRTYPE

MAGINCR

C*8

R

Range Description and Default
Color code the plot based on dip magnitude.
Default Value = NO COLOR CODE
Options:
NO COLOR CODE

= Do not color code the plot

COLOR CODE

= Color code the plot

0–255 Starting color index value. Used if CLRMODE = COLOR
CODE.
Default Value = 56
Number of color levels. Used if CLRMODE = COLOR
CODE.
Default Value = 4
Type of magnitude incrementing. Arrow color changes
based on magnitude values. Used if CLRMODE =
COLOR CODE.
Default Value = EVEN
Options:
EVEN

= Increment magnitude values by even
increments of MAGINCR

UNEVEN

= Magnitude values are specified by
MAGLEV

Magnitude increment value for changing the arrow color.
Used if INCRTYPE = EVEN and CLRMODE = COLOR
CODE.
MAGMAX – MAGMIN )
Default Value = (--------------------------------------------------------------NUMCLR

° MAGLEV

R2003.12.0

R

Array of up to 20 magnitude levels for changing the arrow
color. Required if INCRTYPE = UNEVEN and
CLRMODE = COLOR CODE.
Note: The number of color levels specified by NUMCLR
is the number of values required if INCRTYPE =
UNEVEN.

Process

138

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Display
Name

DISPLAY

Alternate Name DISP
Function

This process allows the user to create or display on a graphic screen
during an interactive (foreground) execution of a ZCL command
stream.
The output device (typically a terminal) used to execute the command
language must be a graphics device supported by Landmark and your
system personnel. ZCL execution is halted each time a picture is
displayed. To continue execution, press any key.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DEVTYPE

AOISPEC

DRAW

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
I

C*8

C*4

Range Description and Default
Workstation Type used for running ZCL. Valid values for
the number can be found in the Landmark Workstation
Description File (WDFILE) and are specific to your
installation.
Note: Ask your system personnel for a list of valid
Workstation Types from the WDFILE.
Display all or a windowed portion of the picture.
Default Value = FULL AOI
Options:
FULL AOI

= Entire picture

WINDOW

= Selected portion of picture described by
parameters XMIN through YMAX

Graphics features to display.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= Display all features present on picture

YES

= Display only those features supplied by the
LGBTYPES parameter

NO

= Do not display those features supplied by the
LGBTYPES parameter

Process

139

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

AOISCALE

C*12

Scaling method for parameters XMIN through YMAX.
For example, if you wish to display the upper right quarter
of the picture, set AOISCALE = NORMALIZED, XMIN
= 0.5. XMAX = 1.0, YMIN = 0.5, YMAX = 1.0.
Default Value = SCALED
Options:
SCALED

= Map or engineering units

UNSCALED

= Plotter units (in or cm)

NORMALIZED

= Units with the lower left corner of the
picture set to (0,0) and the upper
right corner set to (1,1); x and y are
scaled independently

° XMIN

R

Minimum x for the window in units specified by
AOISCALE. Required if AOISPEC = WINDOW.

° XMAX

R

Maximum x for the window in units specified by
AOISCALE. Required if AOISPEC = WINDOW.

° YMIN

R

Minimum y for the window in units specified by
AOISCALE. Required if AOISPEC = WINDOW.

° YMAX

R

Maximum y for the window in units specified by
AOISCALE. Required if AOISPEC = WINDOW.

I

Array of up to 40 graphics features to display.
One code is assigned to each feature, unless all available
types are to copy, in which case set LGBTYPES = 0. For
a complete list of available graphics features, see
“Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes” in the Z-MAP
Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = 0, copy all features

LGBTYPES

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Process

140

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

DMS To From DEG
Name

DMS TO FROM DEG

Alternate Name DMS DEG
Function

This process converts latitude/longitude coordinates from character
string representations of integer degree-minute-seconds to floating
point degrees and vice versa.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

MFDIN

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

• DIRECT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*12

Name of input file.
Range Options:
Data, contour, fault or vertex files
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Direction of the conversion.
Options:
DEG TO DMS

= Convert floating point latitude/
longitude to integer degrees,
minutes, and seconds

DMS TO DEG

= Convert integer degrees, minutes,
and seconds to floating point
latitude/longitude

DMSLAFLD

I

Field number of the DMS character latitude field
(type 51). Used if DIRECT = DMS TO DEG.
Default Value = First DMS character latitude field

DMSLOFLD

I

Field number of the DMS character longitude field
(type 52). Used if DIRECT = DMS TO DEG.
Default Value = First DMS character longitude field

LATYFLD

I

Field number of the latitude field. Used if DIRECT =
DEG TO DMS.
Default Value = First latitude field

Process

141

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LONXFLD

I

Range Description and Default
Field number of the longitude field. Used if DIRECT =
DEG TO DMS.
Default Value = First longitude field

LATFLDNM C*20

Name of output latitude field.
This is the integer degrees, minutes, seconds latitude field
name if DIRECT = DEG TO DMS or the floating point
latitude field name if DIRECT = DMS TO DEG.
Default Value = Based on the field type of the new field

LONFLDNM C*20

Name of output longitude field.
This is the integer degrees, minutes, seconds longitude
field name if DIRECT = DEG TO DMS or the floating
point longitude field name if the DIRECT = DMS TO
DEG.
Default Value = Based on the field type of the new field

Process

142

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Dual Data Ops
Name

DUAL DATA OPS

Alternate Name DATA DATA TO DATA
Function

This process performs the selected operation on two input fields, then
stores the results in a single output field. Available operations are listed
as Options under OPNAME.
Each use of this process creates a new data file. This file contains all
the fields and records of the input (old) data file plus the newly
calculated field. The new field either replaces an old field or the field is
added as a new field.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• DATAIN

C*24

Name of the input data file.

MFDIN

I

INFLD1

I

Field number of the first input field. This must not be a
character field.
Default Value = First Z Value field
or
First numeric field, if no z field is available

INFLD2

I

Field number of the second input field. This field must not
be a character field.
Default Value = First Z Value field
or
First numeric field, if no z field is available

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0

Process

143

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME

DATAOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*8

Name of data operation to perform.
Options:

C*24

MFDOUT

I

ZNON

R

ADD

= Add the two input fields

SUBTRACT

= Subtract INFLD2 from INFLD1

MULTIPLY

= Multiply the two input fields

DIVIDE

= Divide INFLD1 by INFLD2

MAXIMUM

= Take the Maximum of the two input
fields

MINIMUM

= Take the Minimum of the two input
fields

CLIPMAX

= Clip values of INFLD2 to INFLD1
whenever INFLD2 exceeds INFLD1

CLIPMIN

= Clip values of INFLD1 to INFLD2
whenever INFLD1 is less than
INFIELD2

BLANKMAX

= Blank values of INFLD1 if INFLD1
exceeds INFLD2

BLANKMIN

= Blank values of INFLD1 if INFLD1 is
less than INFLD2

AZIMUTH

= Field A represents the slope dZ/dX in
the X direction, and field B represents
the slope dZ/dY in the Y direction. This
value is expressed in radians. The new
field plots the direction of the slope
angle calculated clockwise from the
north.

Name of the output data file.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1
Null data value to use in the output control point field. If
writing to an existing field, this value replaces the original
ZNON value of that field.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

Process

144

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FLDNAME

C*20

Name for the output field.
Default Value = Old field name, if this z field is to replace
an existing field in the input file
or
Based on the field type of the new field, if the
output field is a new field

OUTFLD

I

Field number of the output field.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control
point file, then legitimate values for the output field
would be from 0 to N+1 but not N+2.
A value of 0 or N+1 means that a new field is created; a
value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input control point file is replaced by this output field.
Note: You cannot replace a character field; you must
create a new one.
Default Value = 0, create a new field

FLDTYPE

C*20

Field type of the output field.
Used only if creating a new field, if OUTFLD = 0 or N+1.
For a list of available field types, see “Appendix B. File
and Field Codes” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = Current type, if replacing a field
or
Z-VALUE, if a new z field is being created

Process

145

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Dual Grid Ops
Name

DUAL GRID OPS

Alternate Name GRID GRID TO GRID
Function

This process performs the selected operation on two input grids, then
stores the results in a single output grid. Available operations are listed
as Options under OPNAME.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

• GRIDIN1

C*24

MFDIN1

I

• GRIDIN2

C*24

MFDIN2

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the first input grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the first input grid file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the second input grid
file.
Default Value = 0

Process

146

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
C*8

Range Description and Default
Grid operation to perform.
Options:
ADD

= Add the two input grids.

SUBTRACT

= Subtract GRIDIN2 from GRIDIN1.

MULTIPLY

= Multiply GRIDIN1 by GRIDIN2 (grid
node by grid node, not matrix
multiplication).

DIVIDE

= Divide GRIDIN1 by GRIDIN2 (grid
node by grid node).

MAXIMUM

= Take the maximum of the two input
grids (grid node by grid node). ZNON is
output if either node is ZNON.OP

MINIMUM

= Take the minimum of the two input grids
(grid node by grid node). ZNON is
output if either node is ZNON.

OR

= Perform logical OR operation.

AND

= Perform logical AND operation.

CMPLMENT

= Perform logical COMPLEMENT
operation.

CLIPMAX

= Clip values of GRIDIN1 to GRIDIN2
whenever GRIDIN1 exceeds GRIDIN2.

CLIPMIN

= Clip values of GRIDIN1 to GRIDIN2
whenever GRIDIN1 is less than
GRIDIN2.

BLANKMAX

= Blank values of GRIDIN1 if GRIDIN1
exceeds GRIDIN2.

BLANKMIN

= Blank values of GRIDIN1 if GRIDIN1 is
less than GRIDIN2.

MERGEHI

= Take the maximum of the two input
grids. If only one grid is defined at some
node, set the output grid node to the
value that is defined.

MERGELO

= Take the minimum of the two input
grids. If only one grid is defined at some
node, set the output grid node to the
value that is defined.

Process

147

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• OPNAME

Options: (cont.)
AZIMUTH

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

ZNON

R

AOISRCE

C*12

= Field A represents the slope dZ/dX in the
X direction, and field B represents the
slope dZ/dY in the Y direction. This
value is expressed in radians. The new
field plots the direction of the slope angle
calculated clockwise from the north.

Name of the output grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
Null data value for the output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30
Method for computing the output grid’s Area of Interest
(AOI). Used if grids are non-conformal.
Default Value = GRIDIN1
Options:
GRIDIN1

= AOI of the first grid

GRIDIN2

= AOI of the second grid

UNION

= AOI of the union of the AOIs of first and
second grids

INTERSECTION

XINCSRCE

R2003.12.0

C*8

= AOI of the intersection of the
AOIs of first and second grids

Method for computing the output grid’s x direction
gridding interval. Used if grids are non-conformal and
AOISRCE = UNION or INTERSECTION.
Default Value = GRIDIN1
Options:
GRIDIN1

= x direction gridding interval of the first
grid

GRIDIN2

= x direction gridding interval of the second
grid

SPECIFY

= x direction gridding interval is specified
by XINC

Process

148

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

YINCSRCE

C*8

Range Description and Default
Method for computing the output grid’s y direction
gridding interval. Used if grids are non-conformal and
AOISRCE = UNION or INTERSECTION.
Default Value = GRIDIN1
Options:
GRIDIN1

= y direction gridding interval of the first grid

GRIDIN2

= y direction gridding interval of the second
grid

SPECIFY

= y direction gridding interval is specified by
XINC

° XINC

R

Gridding interval in x direction. Required if AOISRCE =
UNION or INTERSETION, XINSRCE = SPECIFY, and
grids are non-conformal.

° YINC

R

Gridding interval in y direction. Required if AOISRCE =
UNION or INTERSETION, YINSRCE = SPECIFY, and
grids are non-conformal.

Process

149

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

E
Name

E

Alternate Name

R2003.12.0

Function

This process is used to force ZCL to execute any as-yet unexecuted
ZCL processes that come before the E Process statement. Normally,
ZCL makes a pass through all of the ZCL commands, checking for
syntax or logic errors before any processes are executed. This process
allows you to execute the first part of the command stream even
though the rest of it may not be error-free.

Parameters

No parameters

Process

150

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Echo
Name

ECHO

Alternate Name
Function

This process provides debugging information about the ZCL driver
program. ECHO prints out the values of all parameters for the ZCL
process whether they are entered on the command line,
back-referenced, computed, or defaulted.
To turn on the debugging process, an ECHO Process statement is
placed before the processes to debug. To turn off debugging, place an
ECHO Process statement after the process.
You can obtain summary information about the entire run by placing
an ECHO Process statement in front of the STOP command.

Notes

To obtain more debugging information, including the input parameters
to all called SIL subroutines, use the D process (page 106). This
additional debugging information helps Landmark customer support
personnel identify whether the error is in ZCL/SIL or in a user-entered
parameter.

Example
C
ECHO:
C
POINT
C
ECHO:

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Turn on debugger
/

Execute a process
GRIDDING: ...

/

Turn off debugger
/

No parameters

Process

151

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Equity Report
Name

EQUITY REPORT

Alternate Name EQUITY
Function

This process generates an equity report on a disk file using the files
output by the VOLUME REPORT Process, which is a data file on an
MFD that contains a polygon Segment ID and/or a polygon name field
plus a group of z fields.
Each z field name is the title of a column output to the report.
Generally, the z field name is the name of a participant in the equity
group. Each record of this file contains a tract name or Segment ID,
with the interests of each owner in that tract expressed either as a
fraction or a percentage.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DATAINS

C*24

MFDINS

I

• EQUITY

MFDEQUIT

REPORT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 10 names of the files output by VOLUME
REPORT to use as input.
At least one file name must be provided.
0–5

C*24

I

C*80

Array of up to 10 entries, which contains the number of
the MFDs for the volumetric total files.
Default Value = 0
Name of the equity description file.
This file lists the owner interests for each tract. See
Function (above).

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input equity
description file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output report file.
This is the name of an output formatted disk file. The file
has a 132-byte record width, that is, 132 characters wide.
Default Value = Blank

Process

152

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
SCALE

REPORUNI

EQUITUNI

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

R

Scale factor to apply to the volumetrics results taken from
the VOLUME REPORT files.
For example, if the volumes stored in these file(s) are in
cu.ft. and you want the report to be in acre.ft., then the
scale factor should be set to 2.295684E–05, the
conversion factor between cu.ft. and acre.ft.
Default Value = 1.0

C*8

Units of the production factor and company productions
in the equity report.
Production can be expressed in either fractions (total =
1.0) or percentages (total = 100.0).
Default Value = FRACTION
Options:

C*8

FRACTION

= Production is expressed as a fraction

PERCENT

= Production is expressed as a percentage

Units of the owner interests in the equity description file.
The owner interests can be expressed in either fractions
(total = 1.0) or percentages (total = 100.0).
Default Value = FRACTION
Options:
FRACTION

= Owner interest is expressed as a fraction

PERCENT

= Owner interest is expressed as a
percentage

TITLE

C*80

Array of up to 10 entries representing lines in the title on
each page of the report, each of which may be 80
characters long.
Default Value = Blank

SEGHEAD

C*80

Header text for the column that contains the polygon
name or Segment ID. This text string can contain up to 3
lines of header text, each line SEGWIDTH long.
Default Value = Blank

SEGWIDTH

I

5–40

COLWIDTH

I

10–40 Width of all columns except for the polygon name or
Segment ID column.
Default Value = 15

Width of the polygon name or Segment ID column.
Default Value = 20

Process

153

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PAGENUM

C*4

PAGEBIAS

DATE

FILEREP

POSITION

PAGELEN

R2003.12.0

I

C*4

C*4

C*8

I

Range Description and Default
Page number prints in the top right corner of each page.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Print the page number

NO

= Do not print the page number

Number added to the calculated page number before it is
printed.
Default Value = 0
Date prints at the top of each page on the report.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Print the current date

NO

= Do not print the date

Report file name prints in the top left corner of each page
on the report.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES

= Print the report file name

NO

= Do print the report file name

Lateral position of the report on the page. This option
allows both the title and columns to be centered on the
page, or the column to be left-justified with the title
starting in the specified position right of the left margin.
For example, if POSITION = ′10′ then the title would be
indented 9 characters from the left side of the page.
If CENTER or CENTRE is specified then both the page
title and the columns are centered on the page.
Any numbers specified for this parameter must be
enclosed in single quotes since the data type is C.
Default Value = CENTER
Number of lines per page on the report.
Default Value = 58

Process

154

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
DNUM

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
Use number of the optional output DATA BLOCK.
This DATA BLOCK is filled with the number of physical
pages and the number of logical pages in the report.
Generally the number of logical and physical pages are
the same. However, if a single line of the report cannot fit
on one line on the physical page, then each logical page
will consist of multiple physical pages.
The DATA BLOCK must be of type INTEGER and
contain at least two elements. The number of physical
pages is deposited in the first element and the number of
logical pages in the second.

Process

155

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Evaluate
Name

EVALUATE

Alternate Name EVAL
Function

This process evaluates a polynomial function to produce a grid.

Example

Polynomial = + BY + CY 2 + DX + EXY + FXY 2 + GX 2 + HX 2 Y + IX 2 Y

This is a 2nd degree polynomial; DEGREE = 2 and coefficients are
dimensioned as a [ ( 2 + 1 ) × ( 2 + 1 ) ] = 9 array in the Data Block
DNUM. The array is loaded as follows:

Table 2:
Index of Coefficient

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Coefficients for:

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

Powers of X

0

0

0

1

1

1

2

2

2

Powers of Y

0

1

2

0

1

2

0

1

2

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

DEGREE

I

SPECIFY

C*12

Range Description and Default
Name of the output grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
Highest degree of the polynomial.
For example, if X cubed is the highest term in the
polynomial, then DEGREE = 3. If only a flat grid
(constant) is derived, then DEGREE = 0.
Default Value = 0
Method of inputting grid. If grid increments are input, the
number of rows and columns is figured using the grid
AOI. If the number of rows and columns are input, the
increments are derived.
Default Value = ROW & COLS
Options:
INCREMENTS

= Increments are given.

ROWS & COLS

= Number of rows and columns is
given.

Process

156

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° NUMROWS

I

Number of rows in grid. Required if SPECIFY = ROWS
& COLS.

° NUMCOLS

I

Number of columns in grid. Required if SPECIFY =
ROWS & COLS.

° XINC

R

The x increment for grid. Required if SPECIFY =
INCREMENTS.

° YINC

R

The y increment for grid. Required if SPECIFY =
INCREMENTS.

• XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the output gridding area.

• XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the output gridding area.

• YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the output gridding area.

• YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the output gridding area.

ZNON

R

Null data value for the output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

• DNUM

I

Use number of the input DATA BLOCK that contains the
coefficients of the terms in the polynomial function.

Process

157

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Export
Name

EXPORT

Alternate Name EXPT
Function

This process transfers a file in a master file (MFD) to a formatted disk
file.

Notes

For a description of how to set up a Format Group and transfer files,
see “Appendix D. Import/Export” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference
Manual.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

Name of the file to export.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the file to export.
Default Value = 0

DICTNARY

C*80

Name of the dictionary file that contains the format group
description to use when exporting the file.
If no name is specified, data is exported with defaults
computed from the file parameters. See the explanation of
a dictionary file in “Appendix D. Import/Export” in the
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = Blank

GROUP

C*40

Name of the format group in the dictionary to use. Used if
DICTNARY is supplied.
Default Value = Blank

DISKFILE

C*80

Name of a formatted disk file to contain the information
to export.

Process

158

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

INCLHIST

C*12

Range Description and Default
Use of header to contain file format information at top of
the exported file.
This format information allows the file to import back
into an MFD in exactly the same form it was in before
export.
Default Value = HEADER
Options:
HEADER

= Include file history and format group
information (file format) in output data
file.

NO HEADER

= Do not include history and file format
group information with output data.

GRPCHAR

C*1

Format group data identifier character. Used if
INCLHIST = HEADER.
Default Value = @

CMTCHAR

C*1

Comment data identifier character. Used if INCLHIST =
HEADER.
Default Value = !

HISCHAR

C*1

History data identifier character. Used if INCLHIST =
HEADER.
Default Value = +

Process

159

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Export CPS File
Name

EXPORT CPS FILE

Alternate Name CPS EXPORT
Function

This process takes a grid, data, fault, vertex, or contour file and
converts it to a grid or data file on the CPS SAVE file by SAVE file
number.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• CPSFILE

Range Description and Default

C*80

Name of the CPS SAVE file.

DISKUNIT

I

0–99

SAVENUM

I

1–100 Output SAVE file number on the disk file to contain the
CPS data. If SAVENUM = 1, then create new file;
otherwise, open and append to old file.
Default Value = 1

• FILEIN

MFDIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*24

I

FORTRAN logical unit on which to open the CPS SAVE
file.
Default Value = 11

Name of the input file to export to the CPS SAVE file.
Range Options:
Grid, data, contour, fault, and vertex files
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

Process

160

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
FRMTTYPE

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Type of format.
Default Value = EXTENDED, for a grid file
or
XYZ, for a data file
Options:
EXTENDED

= Store the minimum and maximum x,
y and z values, grid increments and
the number of rows and columns with
the grid file

ORIGINAL

= Store only the number of rows and
columns with the grid file

XY

= Output the data in an X, Y format,
i.e., contour files

XYZ

= Output the data in an X, Y, Z format,
i.e., fault and vertex files

XYZABW

= Output the data in an X, Y, Z, DZ/
DX, DZ/DY, Z WT format

XYZABCDEW

= Output the data in an X, Y, Z, DZ/
DX, DZ/DY, DZ2/DXDY, X WT, Y
WT, Z WT format

Process

161

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Export ZGF File
Name

EXPORT ZGF FILE

Alternate Name ZGF EXPORT
Function

This process exports a Z-MAP Graphics File (ZGF) to a neutral
graphics disk file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DISKFILE

C*80

Name of the neutral graphics file to contain the pictures.

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file (ZGF) that contains the pictures
for export.

REPORT

C*4

Produce a status report.
Default Value = YES
Options:

SELECT

° PICTURES

° DBPICS

ZGFUNIT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*4

YES

= Status report produced

NO

= No status report produced

Method of selecting pictures in the graphics file (ZGF) for
export.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= All the pictures on the file

ONLY

= User can specify up to 50 pictures for export

EXCEPT

= User can specify up to 50 pictures that are
not for export

C*80

Array of up to 50 names of pictures to export. Required if
the parameter DBPICS is not supplied and SELECT =
ONLY or EXCEPT.

I

Number of the DATA BLOCK that contains the names of
the pictures to export. Required if the parameter
PICTURES is not supplied and SELECT = ONLY or
EXCEPT.

I

0–99

FORTRAN logical unit for the graphics file (ZGF).
Default Value = 27

Process

162

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DISKUNIT

I

Range Description and Default
0–99

FORTRAN logical unit for the neutral graphics disk file.
Default Value = 10

Process

163

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Fault Balancer
Name

FAULT BALANCER

Alternate Name BIFURCATE BALANCE
Function

This process receives as input a file of center line faults with a vertical
separation field. Bifurcation is the point where two faults meet.
Bifurcation points are found, and each branch fault is clipped or
snapped to an exact meeting with its main fault. Vertical separation
values of the faults meeting at each bifurcation are adjusted so that the
total around each joint is zero.
You can use this process to place realistic values of vertical separation
at bifurcation points in a fault set that already has some vertical
separation values determined, such as the fault set that can be output by
the FAULT SHRINKER Process.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• FAULTIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input fault file.
0–5

FAULTOUT C*24
MFDOUT
REPORT

R2003.12.0

I
C*4

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output fault file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output fault file.
Default Value = 1
Extent of the processing analysis report.
Default Value = FULL
Options:
NONE

= No report, except error messages.

FULL

= Full report.

FLTXFLD

I

Field number for x field in input fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number for y field in input fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number for Segment ID field in input fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

Process

164

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FLTVSFLD

I

Field number for Vertical Separation field in input fault
file.
Default Value = First Vertical Separation field

TOLERANC

R

Digitization precision tolerance.
A fault whose end is within this distance of another fault
trace is considered a branch of that fault trace, and clipped
or snapped accordingly. A fault trace shorter than this
distance is discarded.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 256 of diagonal of bounding rectangle
of fault data

DISTANCE

R

Distance at which vertical separation, extrapolated along
a fault trace, is considered to lose significance.
Note: The weight of a vertical separation is considered to
decrease exponentially along the fault:
–distance along fault
W = W 0 × exp  --------------------------------------------------


DISTANCE

where exp is the exponential function.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 16 of diagonal of bounding rectangle
of fault data

R2003.12.0

Process

165

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Fault Locator
Name

FAULT LOCATOR

Alternate Name FLOC
Function

This process determines the circles of possible intersections between a
target horizon and one or more faults near the wells defined by an input
data file. Horizon depths as well as fault depths, dip angles and throws
in each well must be encoded in data fields on the input data file.
The outputs are a contour file of digitized circles corresponding to
possible intersections between fault faces and horizons, and an
optional data file with contour tags showing the throw of the fault at
the well.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

CNTROUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

DATAOUT

C*24

MFDDATA

I

• INFLD

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input control point file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output contour file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output contour file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output contour annotation data file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output contour
annotation data file.
Default Value = 1
Field number of the horizon of interest.
The horizon’s value is used with fault fields to calculate
separation between the two. If the value in this field is in
depth then the value in the FALTFLD must also be in
depth (i.e., must be the same type of measurement). It is
assumed that the value types are the same, and if they are
not, erroneous results will occur.

Process

166

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SEPMAX

R

Range Description and Default
Maximum separation between a fault used and the
horizon of interest.
Default Value = Largest absolute value of calculated
separation

DEGORRAD C*8

R2003.12.0

Units for measuring the dip angle of the fault.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:

1–10

DEGREES

= Dip angle is measured in degrees.

RADIANS

= Dip angle is measured in radians.

• NUMFALT

I

Number of fault depth/throw/dip angle field triplets in
each record on the input file.

• FALTDFLD

I

Array of up to 10 fault Depth field numbers.
The values of measurement in these fields (i.e., depth,
elevation, etc.) must be the same type of measurement as
values in INFLD field. It is assumed that the value types
are the same, and if they are not, erroneous results will
occur.

• FALTTFLD

I

Array of up to 10 fault Throw field numbers, listed in the
same position as the corresponding Depth field in
FALTDFLD.
The units of measurement for these field values (i.e., feet,
meters, etc.) must be the same units used for values of
FALTDFLD and INFLD fields. It is assumed that the
units are the same, and if they are not, erroneous results
will occur.

• FALTAFLD

I

Array of up to 10 fault Dip Angle field numbers, listed in
the same position as the corresponding Depth field in
FALTDFLD.

Process

167

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Fault Locator New
Name

FAULT LOCATOR NEW

Alternate Name FLOC NEW
Function

Enhanced fault locator operation for wells.
This process determines the ellipses of possible intersection between a
(dipping) target horizon and one or more faults near the wells defined
in the input data file (Tearpock and Bischke, Applied Subsurface
Geological Mapping, 1991, 318-327). Horizon depth, fault depth, dip
angle, and fault vertical separation (throw) fields must be encoded into
the input data file. In order for the horizon to treat as a dipping horizon,
local dip angles and dip azimuth angles must be encoded into the data
file. If they are not specified, the horizon is treated as being horizontal.
The location of the possible intersections can be narrowed down if the
fault dip azimuth angle is encoded into the well data file. If this
information is available, the lines output to the optional vertex file
connect each well with its fault curves at the predicted intersection
locations. If fault dip azimuth angle is not available, the line connects
the well with the fault curves in the vertical direction of constant x.
The optional outputs are:
• A contour file that contains the ellipses of possible intersection of
the near side of the fault and the target horizon (near well curve)
• A contour file that contains the ellipses of possible intersection of
the center line of the fault and the target horizon (center line fault
curve)
• A contour file that contains the ellipses of possible intersection of
the far side of the fault and the target horizon (far well curve)
• A vertex file connecting each well with its fault curves
Assuming that the horizon and fault faces can be represented by
constant planes over the distances involved, then the fault trace for a
fault is tangential to its near well curve. The fault trace on the opposite
side of the fault is tangential to the far well curve, and the center line of
the fault is tangential to the center line fault curve. Each curve is stored
as a contour with its z value equal to the vertical separation of the fault.
If the near and far curves are drawn with hachure lines, hachures point
in toward the fault face.

R2003.12.0

Process

168

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

The optional output vertex file connects each well with its fault curves.
The line connecting the near and far well curves is in the direction of
the fault gap when the fault dip azimuth angle is specified. Each vertex
can have a symbol assigned to it, and the vertices at the near and far
curve intersects are labeled up/down appropriately. The vertical
separation of the fault is stored with the near curve vertex, along with
any other fields in the well data file specified for copying to the vertex
file.
Notes

The use of horizon dip was inspired by the book Applied Subsurface
Geological Mapping. However, the equations in that book were not
used since they are 2D, and 3D equations are required here.

Example
FAULT LOCATOR NEW:010,000 DATAIN
NEARCNTR
HORZDIP
HORDFLD
FALTZFLD
9,
FALTDFLD

=
=
=
=
=

’WELL DATA’,
’NEAR WELL FLOC’,
’YES’, HORZFLD = 3,
4,
HORAFLD = 5,
8,
FALTTFLD =

= 10 /

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input control point file.
0–5

NEARCNTR C*24

MFDNEAR

I

CENTCNTR C*24

R2003.12.0

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output near well fault curve contour file.
The contour levels are equal to the vertical separation of
the fault in the well. If the contours are drawn with
hachures, the hachures point into the fault gap.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output near well fault
curve contour file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output center line fault curve contour file.
The contour levels are equal to the vertical separation of
the fault in the well.
Default Value = Blank

Process

169

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDCENT

I

FARCNTR

C*24

MFDFAR

I

VERTICES

C*24

MFDVERT

I

HORZDIP

FALTAZIM

R2003.12.0

C*4

C*4

Range Description and Default
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output center line fault
curve contour file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output far well fault curve contour file.
The contour levels are equal to the vertical separation of
the fault in the well. If the contours are drawn with
hachures, the hachures point into the fault gap.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output far well fault
curve contour file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output vertex file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output vertex file.
Default Value = 1
Location of the horizon dip angle and dip azimuth angle
fields is the well data file.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES

= Horizon dip angle and dip azimuth angle fields
are in the well data file

NO

= Horizon dip angle and dip azimuth angle fields
are not in the well data file

Whether the fault azimuth angle field(s) are in the well
data file.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES

= Fault azimuth angle field(s) are in the well data
file

NO

= Fault azimuth angle field(s) are not in the well
data file

XFLD

I

Field number of x field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

Process

170

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

HORZFLD

I

Field number of the target horizon’s z field for which the
fault locator curves are to generate.
Default Value = First Z Value field

HORDFLD

I

Field number of the horizon dip angle field in the well
data file. Used if HORZDIP = YES.
Default Value = First horizon dip angle field

HORAFLD

I

Field number of the horizon dip azimuth angle field in the
well data file. Used if HORZDIP = YES.
Default Value = First horizon dip azimuth angle field

SEPMAX

R

Maximum separation between a fault used and the
horizon of interest.
Default Value = Largest absolute value of calculated
separation

DEGORRAD C*8

R2003.12.0

Units for measuring the dip angle of the fault.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:

1–10

DEGREES

= Dip angle is measured in degrees

RADIANS

= Dip angle is measured in radians

NUMFALT

I

Number of sets of fault fields on each record in the well
data file.
Each set must contain the same number of fields and must
contain the z field, vertical separation, and dip angle
fields. The use of the dip azimuth angle field is optional:
If it is used, it must be specified for every fault.
Default Value = 1

• FALTZFLD

I

Array of up to 10 fault depth field numbers.
The values of measurement in these fields (i.e., depth,
elevation, etc.) must be the same type of measurements as
the values in field HORZFLD. It is assumed that the units
are the same; if they are not, erroneous results will occur.

• FALTTFLD

I

Array of up to 10 fault throw field numbers, listed in the
same position as the corresponding field in FALTSFLD.
The units of measurement for these field values (i.e., feet,
meters, etc.) must be the same units used for values of
fields FALTZFLD and HORZFLD. It is assumed that the
units are the same; if they are not, erroneous results will
occur.

Process

171

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• FALTDFLD

I

Array of up to 10 fault dip angle field numbers, listed in
the same position as the corresponding field in
FALTSFLD.

FALTAFLD

I

Array of up to 10 fault dip azimuth angle field numbers,
listed in the same position as the corresponding field in
FALTSFLD. Used if FALTAZIM = YES.

NEARSYM

I

Symbol code to output to the vertex file at the near well
fault curve intersections. Used if VERTICES parameter is
specified.
Default Value = 1

CENTSYM

I

Symbol code to output to the vertex file at the center line
fault curve intersections. Used if VERTICES parameter is
specified.
Default Value = 1

FARSYM

I

Symbol code to output to the vertex file at the far well
fault curve intersection. Used if VERTICES parameter is
specified.
Default Value = 1

WELLSYM

I

Symbol code to output to the vertex file at the well
locations. Used if VERTICES parameter is specified.
Default Value = 0

NUMCOPY

I

° COPYFLDS

I

0–45

Number of additional fields to copy from the well data
file to the vertex file. Used if VERTICES parameter is
specified.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 45 field numbers for the fields to copy
from the input well file to the vertex file. The values are
stored with the near well fault curve intersects. Required
if VERTICES parameter is specified and NUMCOPY is
not zero.

Process

172

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Fault Migration
Name

FAULT MIGRATION

Alternate Name FAULT MIGR
Function

Fault migration moves a set of fault center line traces from one horizon
to an adjacent horizon given the formation thickness along the traces.
The user can specify rates of change of fault dip and fault throw to
model the migration of listric faults.
The dip angle and formation thickness values along the fault trace can
be user specified constant values. The formation thickness value can be
computed by back interpolation from an unfaulted isopach model of
the formation. Finally, the thickness field must be removed from the
migrated fault file before that file is used in throw gridding.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FAULTS

MFDFAULT

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

Name of input fault center line file.
The input file must contain a throw field and optionally
contain dip angle and formation thickness fields.
Range Options:
Fault or vertex file
0–5

FAULTOUT C*24

R2003.12.0

Number of the MFD that contains the input center line
fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output center line fault file.

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output center line fault
file.
Default Value = 1

FLTXFLD

I

Field number of x field in the input center line fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number of y field in the input center line fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the center line
fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

FLTTFLD

I

Field number of the Throw field on the input fault file.
Default Value = First Throw field

Process

173

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FLTAFLD

I

Field number of the Dip Angle field on the input fault file.
Default Value = First Dip Angle field

FLTZFLD

I

Field number of the z field (formation thickness) on the
input fault file.
Default Value = First Z Value field

DIPANGLE

R

Override value for the dip angle field. If DIPANGLE = 0,
then the value in the dip angle field on the file is used.
Default Value = 0.0

THICKNES

R

Override value for the thickness field. If THICKNES = 0,
then the value in the thickness field on the file is used.
Default Value = 0.0

DELTADIP

R

Change in dip angle per unit of increasing depth.
Note: This parameter is used for listric faults.
Default Value = 0.0

DELTATHR

R

Change in throw per unit of increasing depth.
Default Value = 0.0

DEPUNITS

C*20

DIRECT

LENMIN

R2003.12.0

C*4

R

Range Description and Default

Type of depth measurement.
Default Value = POSITIVE DEPTH
Options:
POSITIVE DEPTH

= Units of depth are positive

NEGATIVE
DEPTH

= Units of depth are negative

Direction to migrate the fault traces.
Default Value = UP
Options:
UP

= Migrate the fault traces to a higher horizon

DOWN

= Migrate the fault traces to a lower horizon

Minimum acceptable length for the resulting fault traces.
Shorter fault traces are treated as unimportant and
therefore will not be written to the output fault file.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

174

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
THROWMIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
R

Range Description and Default
Minimum acceptable absolute throw value for the ends of
the resulting fault traces. Smaller throws are treated as
unimportant and are set to zero.
Fault traces that have absolute throw values at the ends
which are smaller than THROWMIN will have these ends
cut before the traces are written to the output file. The
resulting fault traces will have throw values equal to zero
at their ends, but are shorter.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

175

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Fault Profiling
Name

FAULT PROFILING

Alternate Name FAULT PROF
Function

Fault throw profiling takes a set of fault center line traces and creates
throw profiles for them on a vertex file, so that when they are drawn on
a map with the fault traces they provide a visual display of the
variation in throw along the length of the fault trace.

Notes

A primary use of this module is to verify that the vertical separation
(throw) is conserved at fault bifurcations.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FAULTS

MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

Name of input fault center line file with throw field.
Range Options:
Fault or vertex file
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input center line
fault file.
Default Value = 0

FAULTOUT C*24

Fault
file

Name of output fault file. This file contains the fault
throws as mapview profiles.

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output fault file.
Default Value = 0

VERTICES

C*24

MFDVERT

I

FALTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field on the input fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FALTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field on the input fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

Name of output vertex file. This file contains the fault
throw profiles as closed map view polygons that can be
colorfilled or displayed with dashed lines to enhance the
final map display.
Range Options:
Vertex file
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output vertex file.
Default Value = 1

Process

176

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FALTSFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field on the input fault
file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

FALTTFLD

I

Field number of the Throw field on the input fault file.
Default Value = First Throw field

SCALE

R

DEPUNITS

DIRECT

R2003.12.0

C*20

C*4

Range Description and Default

0.0–
0.1

Scale factor for distance of profiles from center line
traces.
The largest throw on the file is offset from its center line
trace by SCALE times the distance across the diagonal of
the file’s AOI.
Default Value = 0.03
Type of depth measurement.
Default Value = POSITIVE DEPTH
Options:
POSITIVE DEPTH

= Units of depth are positive

NEGATIVE
DEPTH

= Units of depth are negative

Side of the center line traces on which profiles should
appear.
Default Value = UP
Options:
UP

= Profiles should appear on the up-thrown side
of the center line fault traces

DOWN

= Profiles should appear on the down-thrown
side of the center line fault traces

Process

177

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Fault Shrinker
Name

FAULT SHRINKER

Alternate Name SHRINK
Function

This process automatically converts the closed fault polygons to fault
center lines. If a standard Landmark Seismic data file is provided as an
optional input, then the program will automatically compute vertical
separation (throw) and fault gap (heave) values along the fault center
lines at those points where the seismic lines cross the fault center lines;
and a fault dip angle field is created, although that field is filled
entirely with void values.
If no seismic data is available as input, the program can simply
produce the center line fault file with valid values in the fault gap
(heave) field and void values in all the vertical separation (throw) and
dip angle field positions.
Alternatively, if seismic data is not available and the user is willing to
assign a constant fault dip angle for the entire dataset, then the
magnitude of the fault vertical separations (throw) can be determined
automatically by trigonometric calculations based on the width of the
input fault polygons. In this case, signed values can be assigned to the
fault vertical separations if the user will specify a predominate fault dip
direction or specify whether faults dip in the direction of the convex
side of a fault center line or the concave side.

Notes

If an input fault polygon does not close, then it is assumed that the fault
is already in center line format. Therefore, assuming that seismic data
is available, this module can be used to assign vertical separation
values directly to center line fault files that do not already have such
values.

Valid Combinations for parameter RATIO
In the first approximation, the maximum allowed ratio (the distance
between seismic points on opposite sides of the fault) is divided by the
Heave, i.e., the width of the fault polygon. If fault points are much
farther apart than the heave, it could be because:
• whoever did the seismic interpretation did not put points right next
to the fault polygon
• the seismic line cuts the fault at an oblique angle
• both of the above
In the application, another parameter WIDTHMIN is added to the
heave before calculating the ratio. This is because a vertical or almost
vertical fault will have a very small heave, so the separation between
points, even if very close to the fault, would seem large by comparison;
thus a vertical fault would have no throw.

R2003.12.0

Process

178

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

So, it is more complicated than just an angle. However, in the limiting
case where the seismic points are very close to the fault polygon and
the heave is much greater than WIDTHMIN, RATIO is the maximum
allowed value of the secant of the angle between the seismic line and
the fault trace.

WIDTHMIN
Heave

Seismic line
Angle

Fault trace

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FAULTS
MFDFAULT
DATAIN
MFDDATA

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

Name of the input fault file.
0–5

C*24
I

Name of the input seismic data file.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

FAULTOUT C*24

R2003.12.0

MFDFLOUT

I

INTFTOUT

C*24

MFDINTFT

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD that contains the input seismic data
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output center line fault file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output center line fault
file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output center line fault file that has had any
ZNONs in the throw and/or dip angle fields replaced by
linearly interpolated values.
In order to output this file, the input fault file must have
throw, dip angle, and heave fields.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output center line fault
file with any ZNONs replaced in the throw and/or dip
angle fields.
Default Value = 1

Process

179

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

EXPFTOUT

C*24

MFDEXPFT

I

EXTRAPLT

C*12

ANALYSIS

REPORT

R2003.12.0

C*12

C*8

Range Description and Default
Name of the output expanded fault file. In order to output
this file, the input center line fault file must contain both a
throw and a dip angle field.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the expanded fault file.
Default Value = 1
How z values along a seismic line are used to compute
throw across a fault.
Default Value = CLOSEST 4PTS
Options:
CLOSEST 2PTS

= Compute the difference between
closest points on opposite sides
of the fault.

CLOSEST 4PTS

= Use the nearest two data points
on both sides of the fault.

Whether throw, dip, and heave values assigned to each
fault trace are analyzed for geologic consistency. Faults
that display reversal of vertical separation (throw) are
listed on the screen.
Default Value = ANALYSIS
Options:
NO ANALYSIS

= Perform no analysis

ANALYSIS

= Perform analysis and write results
to the screen

Extent of intermediate reports printed during execution.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No reports

PARTIAL

= Messages printed at the start of major
operations

FULL

= Intermediate messages printed during
various processing operations

Process

180

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONVEXTY C*8

PRFDIREC

R2003.12.0

C*4

Range Description and Default
Use of convexity of a fault trace to help determine which
side is down dip. Used only if seismic data is not
available.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
CONCAVE

= Downdip on concave side of fault trace

CONVEX

= Downdip on convex side of fault trace

NONE

= Do not use this method

Use of orientation of a fault relative to a general direction
of dip to help determine which side of a fault trace is
down dip. Used only if seismic data is not available.
Default Value = NO
Options:
NO

= Do not use this method

YES

= Use this method

FALTXFLD

I

Field number for x field in the input fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FALTYFLD

I

Field number for y field in the input fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input center
line fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

XFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the input seismic data file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the input seismic data file.
Default Value = First Y field

LINIDFLD

I

Field number of the line name, line number, or Segment
ID field in the input seismic data file.
Default Value = First field of one of these types

ZFLD

I

Field number of the z field in the input seismic data file.
Default Value = First Z Value field

TOLERANC

R

Raster tolerance used in finding fault center lines. Should
be about 1/500 of fault range in x or Y.
Default Value = Computed from input data

Process

181

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

HEAVEMAX

R

Maximum heave of any input fault polygon. This is an
estimate which must be larger than the true maximum
heave. This parameter is used to improve the speed of this
module.
Default Value = Computed from input data

CLOSURE

R

Tolerance used to determine whether an input fault
polygon is closed or open. Normally set to a small
fraction of the range of the input fault data in x or y.
Default Value = Computed from input data

RATIO

R

Tolerance used to detect seismic lines crossing faults at
extremely acute angles. Default value will reject crossings
at less than 30 degrees. A larger value will reject
crossings only when they are at more acute angles. For a
more detailed discussion, see “Valid Combinations” on
page 178.
Note: Ratio is the secant of the angle between a seismic
line and a fault center line.
Default Value = 2.0

WIDTHMIN

R

Minimum heave to assign to an input fault center line
trace for which heave can not be calculated. Should be 0.0
if all the input faults are true polygons with non-zero
interiors.
Otherwise, it should be less than the distance between
adjacent data points along a seismic line.
Default Value = Computed from input data

DIPANGLE

R

° DIPDIREC

R

0.0–
Assigned constant dip angle for all faults. Used if
90.0
PRFDIREC = YES or CONVEXTY = CONVEX or
degrees CONCAVE.
Default Value = 45.0 degrees
Preferred dip direction. Required if PRFDIREC = YES.
Range Options:
–360.0 through 360.0 degrees

Process

182

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Fault Transform
Name

FAULT TRANSFORM

Alternate Name TRANSFORM FAULTS
Function

This process transforms faults without z values into polygon faults with
z values.
The input fault file can contain both center line fault traces and
polygon faults. Center line faults are expanded by the specified heave
to produce polygon faults. The z values for the faults are extracted
from the input grid. An output grid is created with the insides of the
fault polygons filled and tied to the output faults.

Example
FAULT TRANSFORM: 10,00 GRIDIN = ’ORIGINAL GRID’
FAULTIN = ’2-D FAULTS FOR ORIGINAL GRID’
GRIDOUT = ’NEW GRID’
FAULTOUT = ’3-D FAULTS FOR NEW GRID’ /

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN
MFDGRDIN
• FAULTIN

Data
Type
C*24
I

Name of the input grid file.
0–5

C*24

MFDFLTIN

I

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDGRDOT

Range Description and Default

I

Name of the input fault file.
0–5

R2003.12.0

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid file.
Default Value = Based upon the input grid file name

0–5

FAULTOUT C*24
MFDFLTOT

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output fault file.
Default Value = Based upon the input fault file name

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output fault file.
Default Value = 1

Process

183

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONNECT

R

Maximum distance between the two ends of a polygon
fault in x,y units.
If the two ends of a fault trace are closer than CONNECT
apart, the fault trace is closed to form a polygon fault.
Default Value = 0.01 * (maximum range in x or y of the
grid)

HEAVE

R

Expansion width for all center line fault traces in x,y units.
If a fault trace is determined to be a center line fault based
upon CONNECT, it is expanded to form a polygon fault
with a width of HEAVE.
Default Value = 0.2 * grid increment
Range Options:
≥ 0.1 * grid increment

ENDTYPE

Shape of the ends of expanded fault traces.
Default Value = POINTED
Options:
POINTED

= Pointed ends

BLUNT

= Squared off ends

ZMIN

R

Minimum z value for the output faults.
Default Value = Minimum grid z value

ZMAX

R

Maximum z value for the output faults.
Default Value = Maximum grid z value

REPORT

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default

C*8

Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No report

PARTIAL

= Summary report

FULL

= Full report

FLTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the input fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the input fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input fault
file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

Process

184

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

File Conversion
Name

FILE CONVERSION

Alternate Name CONVERT DATA
Function

This process converts a member file of a given type on an MFD into a
member file of another type on an MFD. The tables on the following
pages indicate available file-to-file conversions.
To Type

From
Type

02

03

04

05

06

08

09

11

DAT
A

CNT
R

FAL
T

VER
T

TEXT

XSE
C

SSE
C

DWE
L

X*

X†

X†

X†

X†

X

X

X

DATA
CNTR

X

FALT

X

VERT

X

DWEL

X

SSEC

X

X
X

X

X
X

* This creates a contour file from a CNTR data file of the form:
X, Y, Z, Segment ID (optional)
The file must be organized so that the control points are sequential
along the contours.
† From profile data
§ From seismic data

R2003.12.0

Process

185

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters

LINIDFLD

LNNMFLD

HORNMFLD

SHTPTFLD

NUMZFLDS

SEPARATE

CONNECT

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Opt

Re
q

*

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Opt

Opt

Re
q

PROF/FALT

Re
q

Opt

Opt

PROF/VERT

Re
q

Opt

Opt

SEIS/SSEC

Re
q

Opt

Opt

Re
q

Re
q

XFLD

INFLDS

Other

YFLD

Field Indices

Data File Conversions
DATA/CNTR

PROF/XSEC

Contour File Conversions
CNTR/DATA

Re
q

Re
q

CNTR/FALT

Re
q

Re
q

CNTR/VERT

Re
q

Re
q

Fault File Conversions
FALT/DATA

FALT/VERT

Vertex File Conversions
VERT/DATA

VERT/CNTR
(with Z-Field)

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

Re
q

VERT/FALT

Re
q

Re
q

Deviated Well File Conversions
DWEL/DATA

Seismic Section File Conversions
SSEC/DATA

Re
q

Re
q

Key

R2003.12.0

Process

186

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Req

= Required field on the input file in order to perform the
desired file conversion. These, in general, default to the first
field of the proper type if not specified.

Opt

= Optional field on the input file. If it exists then it is used in
the file conversion. If it does not exist, then the file
conversion proceeds without the aid of this field.


*

= This field is not used in the file conversion process.
= The number of z fields for this file format is one.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

I
C*24

MFDOUT

I

SEPARATE

Range Description and Default

C*24

FILEOUT

• OUTTYPE

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*4

R

Name of the input file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Data type of output file.
Options:
DATA

= Data file

CNTR

= Contour file

FALT

= Fault file

VERT

= Vertex file

XSEC

= Cross-section file

SSEC

= Seismic section file

WLOG

= Well log file

DWEL

= Deviated well file

TEXT

= Text file

Any two successive points farther apart than this distance
are considered to belong to different contours, even if
their z values match. Used for DATA to CNTR and
VERT to CNTR conversions.
Default Value = Diagonal of the AOI, no break

Process

187

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONNECT

R

If the first and last point of a contour line are closer
together than this distance, the contour is closed. Used
only for DATA to CNTR.
Default Value = 0.0

XFLD

I

Field number of x field in the input file. Used depending
on the type of file conversion to perform.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of y field in the input file. Used depending
on the type of file conversion to perform.
Default Value = First Y field

° INFLDS

I

Array of up to 15 field numbers of z fields in FILEIN that
are copied into the output file. Conditionally required
based on the type of file conversion to perform.

° LINIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input data
file. Required for VERT to CNTR conversion.

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field. Used for SSEC to
DATA conversion.
Default Value = First Line Name field

HORNMFLD

I

Field number of the Horizon Name field. Used for profile
DATA to XSEC or SSEC to DATA conversion.
Default Value = First Horizon Name field

SHTPTFLD

I

Field number of the Shotpoint Number field. Used for
SEIS to SSEC conversion.
Default Value = First Shotpoint Number field

° NUMZFLDS

I

Number of z fields to convert. Required if the conversion
is from PROF to XSEC and HORNMFLD is not given or
if the conversion is from SEIS to SSEC.

DISCONT

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default

Inclusion of discontinuity codes on the output file. Used
only for SSEC to DATA conversion.
Default Value = RETAIN
Options:
RETAIN

= Retain discontinuity codes on output file.

OMIT

= Omit discontinuity codes from output file.

Process

188

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
NDECIMAL

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
0–7

Number of decimal places to preserve in the shotpoint
numbers. Used only for SSEC to DATA conversion.
Default Value = 0

Process

189

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

File History
Name

FILE HISTORY

Alternate Name HIST
Function

This process prints the ancestry information available for a file on an
MFD. The user can select the number of generations of information to
print. The information is typically printed using standard ZCL process
and parameter names. Therefore, if a history file is built, a small
amount of editing should produce an executable ZCL command
stream.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN
HEADER

NUMGEN
OUTDEST

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

Name of the input file.
0–5

C*12

I
C*8

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Display of the header information, such as date and time
of creation.
Default Value = NO DISPLAY
Options:

0–10

DISPLAY

= Display file header information.

NO DISPLAY

= Do not display file header information.

Number of generations to display for this file.
Default Value = 10
Destination of the history information.
Default Value = SCREEN
Options:
SCREEN

= Write history to the screen or log file as
standard ZCL execution feedback.

PRINTER

= Build a formatted disk file named
HISTORY.DAT that can be printed when
the ZCL run is completed.

FILE

= Build a formatted disk file named
HISTORY.DAT of the history
information.

Process

190

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

File Info
Name

FILE INFO

Alternate Name
Function

This process provides history and field information about a member
file. The report is either displayed to the screen or output to a formatted
disk file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

Name of the input file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

DISKFILE

C*80

Name of the output formatted disk file. If blank, then the
output is displayed to the screen.
Default Value = Blank

HISTORY

C*12

Display of history information for the file.
Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:

HEADERS

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*12

DISPLAY

= Display history information

NO DISPLAY

= No display of history information

Display of field information (header) for the file.
Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY

= Display field information

NO DISPLAY

= No display of field information

Process

191

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

File Listing
Name

FILE LISTING

Alternate Name LIST FILE
Function

This process lists the contents of any non-grid file. You can specify
fields and window records to list.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN
LISTMODE

TITLE

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24
I
C*12

C*80

Name of the input file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Extent of the listing.
Default Value = FULL
Options:
AUTOMATIC

= List using formats stored with fields
of the file

FULL

= List using parameters FORMATS and
INFLDS

LINE NAME

= List records whose line name matches
entry in NAMELNAR

AREA NAME

= List records whose area name
matches entry in NAMELNAR

WINDOW

= List records whose windowed field
values fall within the window limits

EXCEPTION

= List records whose windowed field
values fall outside the window limits

Title for top line of the listing.
Default Value = Blank

LINPRPAG

I

Number of lines per page.
Default Value = 52

STARTREC

I

Sequential number of the first record to include in the list.
Also: Popular science fiction TV show from the late 60s.
Default Value = First record in file

Process

192

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

STOPREC

I

DISKFILE

C*80

Range Description and Default
Sequential number of the last record to include in the list.
Default Value = Last record in file
Name of the output formatted disk file.
Default Value = Blank

NAMELNAR C*40

Name of the first encountered line name or area name
field for which all are listed. Used if LISTMODE = LINE
NAME or AREA NAME.
Default Value = Blank

INFLDS

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers of the fields to list.
Default Value = First 10 fields in the file.

COLHDRS

C*20

Array of up to 10 field column titles, listed in same
position as corresponding field in INFLDS.
Default Value = Field name

FORMATS

C*20

Array of up to 10 FORTRAN formats, listed in same
position as corresponding field in INFLDS (e.g.,
FORMATS = ′4A4′,′F15.7′).
Default Value = Print format of field in input file

HDRWIDS

I

Array of up to 10 integers specifying the widths of the
field columns, listed in same position as corresponding
field in INFLDS.
Default Value = Print width of field in input file

° WINFLDS

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers to use for windowing the
listing. Required if LISTMODE = WINDOW or
EXCEPTION.

° WINMINS

R

Array of up to 10 values representing the minimum
window limit of WINFLDS, listed in same position as
corresponding field in WINFLDS. Required if
LISTMODE = WINDOW or EXCEPTION.

° WINMAXS

R

Array of up to 10 values representing the maximum
window limit of WINFLDS, listed in same position as
corresponding field in WINFLDS. Required if
LISTMODE = WINDOW or EXCEPTION.

Process

193

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

File Statistics
Name

FILE STATISTICS

Alternate Name FILE STATS
Function

This process gathers and displays statistics on all types of files except
grids.

Example

ZCL can be instructed to write the file statistics into a ZCL Data Block
so that other processes can access this information. Create two Data
Blocks with the ZCL DATA BLOCK Process, the first containing 12
integer locations, and the second with 16 real locations, as in the
following example:
DATA BLOCK:10,00

C
DATA BLOCK:20,00

C
FILE STATISTICS:

HOWMANY = 12,
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’,
DATASIZE = 1

/

HOWMANY = 16,
DATATYPE = ’REAL’,
DATASIZE = 1

/

FILEIN
MFDIN
DBINTG
DBREAL

=
=
=
=

’Z-MAP WELLS’,
1,
10,
20
/

By specifying DBINTG = 10 and DBREAL = 20 in the FILE
STATISTICS Process, the user has specified that DATA BLOCK 10
and DATA BLOCK 20 are filled in the following manner:
For DATA BLOCK 10
Location

R2003.12.0

Information Present

1

Number of fields

2

Number of words

3

Number of records

4

Primary sort field index

5

Projection flag

6

Cartographic projection code

7

Reference spheroid code

8

Projection units code

Process

194

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Location
9

Information Present
UTM reference code

10

Hemisphere code

11

Radius calculation method

12

File Type
1 = GRID
2 = DATA
3 = CNTR
4 = FALT
5 = VERT
6 = TEXT

For DATA BLOCK 20
Location

R2003.12.0

Information Present

1

Rotation angle

2

Separator or marker value

3

Contour equal interval value

4

Least standard parallel

5

Greatest standard parallel

6

Reference latitude

7

Scale factor for reference latitude

8

Reference longitude

9

Scale factor for reference longitude

10

False northing

11

False easting

12

Projection coordinate units factor

13

Semi-major axis

14

Semi-minor axis

15

Azimuthal line (O.M.)

16

Scale factor at origin (O.M.)

Process

195

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

Name of the input file.
Range Options:
All files but grids

MFDIN

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

DBINTG

I

Number of the output INTEGER Data Block.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is
non-zero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists and is
of type INTEGER. The DATA BLOCK must contain at
least 10 locations.
Default Value = 0

DBREAL

I

Number of the output REAL Data Block.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is
non-zero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists and is
of type REAL. The DATA BLOCK must contain at least
16 locations.
Default Value = 0

Process

196

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

File Utility
Name

FILE UTILITY

Alternate Name FILE UTIL
Function

This process copies, renames and deletes files or fields in a file.

Valid Combinations

FILEIN

MFDIN

FILEOUT

MFDOUT

HISTDISP

HISTCOPY

INFLDS

FLDNAMS

FLDTYPS

FORMATS

ZNONS

Parameters

COPY FILE

Y

O

O

O

O

O

N

N

N

N

N

RENAME FILE

Y

O

O

O

O

O

N

N

N

N

N

DELETE FILE

Y

O

N

N

O

N

N

N

N

N

N

COPY FIELDS

Y

O

O

O

O

O

Y

O

O

O

O

RENAME FIELDS

Y

O

O

O

O

O

Y

Y

N

N

N

DELETE FIELDS

Y

O

O

O

O

O

Y

N

N

N

N

COPY+ DUPLICATE

Y

O

O

O

O

O

Y

O

O

O

O

OPNAME

Key:

R2003.12.0

Y = required O = optional; use default if not specified
N = not required

Process

197

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

OPNAME

C*16

Range Description and Default
Type of operation to perform. For the parameters used for
each option, see the previous table.
Default Value = COPY FIELDS
Options:
COPY FILE

= Copy a file to another file

RENAME FILE

= Rename a file

DELETE FILE

= Delete a file

COPY FIELDS

= Copy fields from one file to
another file

RENAME FIELDS

= Rename fields in a file

DELETE FIELDS

= Delete some fields in a file

COPY+DUPLICATE = Copy all fields and duplicate
selected ones

• FILEIN
MFDIN

R2003.12.0

C*24
I

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

HISTDISP

C*16

Name of the input file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Display of file history information.
Default Value = DO NOT DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY HISTORY

= Display file header information

DO NOT DISPLAY

= Do not display file header
information

Process

198

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

HISTCOPY

C*12

° INFLDS

Copy file history information from input file to output
file.
Default Value = DO NOT COPY
Options:
COPY HISTORY

= Copy file history

DO NOT COPY

= Do not copy file history

Array of up to 45 field numbers of the fields to copy,
renamed, or deleted. Required if fields are to copy,
renamed or deleted.

FLDNAMS

C*20

Array of up to 45 new field names for the fields that are
being copied or renamed, listed in same position as
corresponding field in INFLDS.
Default Value = Standard name for the type of field being
copied or renamed

FLDTYPS

I

Array of up to 45 field types for the fields being copied,
listed in same position as corresponding field in INFLDS.
See “Appendix B. File and Field Codes” in the Z-MAP
Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = Same as the input field being copied

FORMATS

C*20

Array of up to 45 FORTRAN formats, listed in same
position as corresponding field in INFLDS (e.g.,
FORMATS = ′4A4′,′F15.7′)
Default Value = Print format of input field being copied

R

Array of up to 45 ZNONs (null values), listed in same
position as corresponding field in INFLDS.
Default Value = ZNON value of input field being copied

ZNONS

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default

Process

199

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Flexing
Name

FLEXING

Alternate Name FILTER
Function

This process adjusts a grid using Biharmonic or Laplacian filtering or a
combination of the two.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

I

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

HOWMASK C*16

FLEXTYPE

R2003.12.0

C*12

Range Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
How MASKGRID is applied.
Default Value = FILTER ZNONS
Options:
FILTER
NON-ZNONS

= Do not filter in areas specified
with ZNONs in the masking grid.

FILTER ZNONS

= Filter only in areas specified with
ZNONs in the masking grid.

Type of grid flexing algorithm to use.
Default Value = BIHARMONIC
Options:
BIHARMONIC

= Biharmonic flexing

LAPLACIAN

= Laplacian flexing

COMBINATION

= Combination of Biharmonic and
Laplacian

Process

200

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

NUMPASS

I

FLEXCTRL

C*16

Range Description and Default
Maximum number of flexing passes.
If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10
Termination method for flexing.
Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur
NUMPASS times without
regard to CUTOFF.

FLEX<=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur a
maximum of NUMPASS times.
A grid curvature change of less
than CUTOFF terminates
flexing.

CUTOFF

R

Termination criterion for grid flexing.
This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates when the change is less than
CUTOFF, and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Default Value = 0.25

SMOOTH

R

UPBIAS

R

Value added to the input grid to form the upper limit grid.
Default Value = 0.0

LOBIAS

R

Negative value added to the input grid to form the lower
limit grid.
Default Value = 0.0

UPSCALE

R

Value to use for multiplying the input grid to form the
upper limit grid.
Default Value = 1.0

0.0–
1.0

Smoothing modulus for grid flexing; there is a trade-off
between smoothing and honoring the data.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original grid,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original grid.
Default Value = 0.2

Process

201

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LOSCALE

R

ZMIN

R

ZMAX

R

DATAIN

Range Description and Default
Negative value to use for multiplying the input grid to
form the lower limit grid.
Default Value = 1.0
Lower limit for allowed grid values.
Default Value = If a control point file is specified by
DATAIN, the minimum z value of data minus
0.1 times the z range of the data
or
Otherwise, –1.0E+30
Upper limit for allowed grid values.
Default Value = If a control point file is specified by
DATAIN, the maximum z value of data plus
0.1 times the z range of the data
or
Otherwise, 1.0E+30

C*24

MFDDATA

I

INFLD

I

Name of the input control point file.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Field number of the field on the input fault file whose
values are used when flexing.
Default Value = First Z Value field

MASKGRID C*24
MFDMASK

R2003.12.0

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0

Name of the input masking grid.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the masking grid.
Default Value = 0

Process

202

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Flt Dip Symb Center
Name

FLT DIP SYMB CENTER

Alternate Name FLT D SYMB C
Function

This process receives center line faults with fault geometry data as
input and generates polylines that, when posted with hachures on a
map, mark the down dip sides of the expanded fault polygons from the
ZCL process POINT GRID PLUS.

Notes

Either a Heave field or a Dip Angle field is needed to generate the dip
symbol traces. If both types of fields exist on the file, regardless of
whether one, both, or neither field is specified, the Heave field takes
precedence.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FAULTS

MFDFAULT

SYMBOLS

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

Name of the input center line fault file that contains
vertical separation (throw) data and fault gap (heave) or
dip angle data.
0–5

C*24

MFDSYMBL

I

EXPFTOUT

C*24

MFDEXPFT

I

DEPUNITS

C*16

Number of the MFD that contains the input center line
fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output vertex file that contains polylines to
post with hachures for down dip symbolization.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output vertex file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output fault file that contains raw, unclipped
expanded fault polygons.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output unclipped
expanded fault polygons.
Default Value = 1
Direction of depth measurement.
Default Value = POSITIVE DEPTH
Options:
POSITIVE DEPTH

= Depth measured downward (e.g.,
Depth or Seismic Time)

NEGATIVE
DEPTH

= Depth measured upward (e.g.,
Elevation)

Process

203

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DIPUNIT

C*8

REPORT

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
Units to measure dip angle.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:
DEGREES

= Measure the dip angle in degrees

RADIANS

= Measure the dip angle in radians

GRADS

= Measure the dip angle in grads

Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No report

PARTIAL

= Summary report

FULL

= Full report

FALTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the input center line fault
file.
Default Value = First x field

FALTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the input center line fault
file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input center
line fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

FLTTHRFD

I

Field number of the Vertical Separation (Throw) field in
the input center line fault file.
Default Value = First Throw field

FLTHEVFD

I

Field number of the Fault Gap (Heave) field in the input
center line fault file.
Default Value = First Heave field

FLTDIPFD

I

Field number of the Dip Angle field in the input center
line fault file.
Default Value = First Dip Angle field

Process

204

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Geographic Connct
Name

GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT

Alternate Name CONNCT GEOGRAPHIC
Function

R2003.12.0

This process connects lines that have endpoints that are less than a
given distance apart. The first point of the second line is dropped and
the lines are given the same Segment ID. A line name match can
optionally be used to prevent lines with different names from being
connected.

Process

205

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Example

The following example starts with a line file where the segments of the
same line are not sequential on the file. By using the GEOGRAPHIC
SORT, GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT and SORT Processes, the segments
are ordered and duplicate endpoints removed.

NUMMFDS = 1, ’geosort.mfd’/
C -----------------------------------------------------------------C
List original file
C -----------------------------------------------------------------FILE LISTING:
FILEIN
= ’geosort c3’,
MFDIN
= 1,
LISTMODE = ’AUTOMATIC’ /
C -----------------------------------------------------------------C
Use GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT to get point seq numbers so that segments can be sorted
C -----------------------------------------------------------------GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT: FILEIN
= ’geosort c3’,
MFDIN
= 1,
FILEOUT = ’geoconnect 1’,
MFDOUT
= 1,
FLDMODE = ’CALCULATE+SAVE’ /
C ----------------------------------------------------------------C
List new file
C ----------------------------------------------------------------FILE LISTING:
FILEIN
= ’geoconnect 1’,
MFDIN
= 1,
LISTMODE = ’AUTOMATIC’ /
C ----------------------------------------------------------------C
Sort to put segments together on the file
C ----------------------------------------------------------------SORT:
DATAIN
= ’geoconnect 1’,
MFDIN
= 1,
DATAOUT = ’sorted 1’,
MFDOUT
= 1,
NFIELDS = 3,
SORTFLDS = 4,
SORTFLD2 = 5,
SORTFLD3 = 6
/
C ----------------------------------------------------------------C
List sorted file
C ----------------------------------------------------------------FILE LISTING:
FILEIN
= ’sorted 1’,
MFDIN
= 1,
LISTMODE = ’AUTOMATIC’ /
C ----------------------------------------------------------------C
Use GEOGRAPHIC SORT to put segments in geographic order
C ----------------------------------------------------------------GEOGRAPHIC SORT:
FILEIN
= ’sorted 1’,
MFDIN
= 1,
FILEOUT = ’geosort 1’,
MFDOUT
= 1 /
C ----------------------------------------------------------------C
List geosorted file
C ----------------------------------------------------------------FILE LISTING:
FILEIN
= ’geosort 1’,
MFDIN
= 1,
LISTMODE = ’AUTOMATIC’ /

R2003.12.0

Process

206

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

C ----------------------------------------------------------------C
Use GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT to remove duplicate endpoints
C ----------------------------------------------------------------GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT:
FILEIN
= ’geosort 1’,
MFDIN
= 1,
FILEOUT = ’completed file 1’, MFDOUT
= 1,
TOLERANC = 3. /
C ----------------------------------------------------------------C
List completed file
C ----------------------------------------------------------------FILE LISTING:
FILEIN
= ’completed file 1’, MFDIN
= 1,
LISTMODE = ’AUTOMATIC’ /
C
STOP:
/

The Output from the command stream is:
******

PROCESS

MFDS

USE

501 ******

******

PROCESS

FILELISTING

USE

503 ******

X (EASTING)
32.71429
41.71429
57.14286
35.50000
26.71428
14.07143
32.07143
24.14286
13.00000
80.28572
71.07143
57.57143
84.35714
77.07143
65.92857
57.78571
35.92857
44.28572
56.71429
******

Y (NORTHING)
69.99999
60.78571
45.35714
43.21428
35.50000
22.21429
69.78571
78.35715
90.35714
89.71429
80.07143
66.35715
18.78571
26.92857
37.42857
44.28572
44.50000
53.71429
66.57143

R2003.12.0

PROCESS

shotpoint num
100.00
105.00
110.00
200.00
210.00
215.00
215.00
220.00
230.00
230.00
235.00
240.00
240.00
245.00
250.00
260.00
100.00
105.00
110.00

GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT

line
name
line2
line2
line2
line1
line1
line1
line2
line2
line2
line1
line1
line1
line2
line2
line2
line2
line1
line1
line1
USE

SEG I.D.
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
504 ******‘

Process

207

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

******

X (EASTING)

PROCESS

FILE LISTING

32.71429
41.71429
57.14286
35.50000
26.71428
14.07143
32.07143
24.14286
13.00000
80.28572
71.07143
57.57143
84.35714
77.07143
65.92857
57.78571
35.92857
44.28572
56.71429

Y (NORTHING)

******

shotpoint num

69.99999
60.78571
45.35714
43.21428
35.50000
22.21429
69.78571
78.35715
90.35714
89.71429
80.07143
66.35715
18.78571
26.92857
37.42857
44.28572
44.50000
53.71429
66.57143
PROCESS

100.00
105.00
110.00
200.00
210.00
215.00
215.00
220.00
230.00
230.00
235.00
240.00
240.00
245.00
250.00
260.00
100.00
105.00
110.00
SORT
DATA FILE:
CREATED:
AT:

R2003.12.0

USE

505 ******

line
name
line2
line2
line2
line1
line1
line1
line2
line2
line2
line1
line1
line1
line2
line2
line2
line2
line1
line1
line1
USE

POINT
SEQUENCE NO.

SEG I.D.
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
6.0

1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
4.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000

506 ******

geoconnect 1
6 MAR 91
16:45

Process

208

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

******

PROCESS

X (EASTING)

FILE LISTING

35.50000
26.71428
14.07143
80.28572
71.07143
57.57143
35.92857
44.28572
56.71429
32.71429
41.71429
57.14286
32.07143
24.14286
13.00000
84.35714
77.07143
65.92857
57.78571

Y (NORTHING)

******

43.21428
35.50000
22.21429
89.71429
80.07143
66.35715
44.50000
53.71429
66.57143
69.99999
60.78571
45.35714
69.78571
78.35715
90.35714
18.78571
26.92857
37.42857
44.28572

USE

507 ******
line
name

shotpoint num

PROCESS

200.00
210.00
215.00
230.00
235.00
240.00
100.00
105.00
110.00
100.00
105.00
110.00
215.00
220.00
230.00
240.00
245.00
250.00
260.00

line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2

GEOGRAPHIC SORT

POINT
SEQUENCE NO.

SEG I.D.

USE

2.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0

1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
4.00000

508 ******

PROCESSING LINE line1
PROCESSING LINE line2
******

PROCESS

X (EASTING)

FILE LISTING

80.28572
71.07143
57.57143
56.71429
44.28572
35.92857
35.50000
26.71428
14.07143
84.35714
77.07143
65.92857
57.78571
57.14286
41.71429
32.71429
32.07143
24.14286
13.00000

Y (NORTHING)

******

R2003.12.0

89.71429
80.07143
66.35715
66.57143
53.71429
44.50000
43.21428
35.50000
22.21429
18.78571
26.92857
37.42857
44.28572
45.35714
60.78571
69.99999
69.78571
78.35715
90.35714
PROCESS

USE

509 ******

shotpoint num
230.00
235.00
240.00
110.00
105.00
100.00
200.00
210.00
215.00
240.00
245.00
250.00
260.00
110.00
105.00
100.00
215.00
220.00
230.00

GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT

line
name
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
USE

POINT
SEQUENCE NO.

SEG I.D.
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
3.0

1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
3.00000
2.00000
1.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
4.00000
3.00000
2.00000
1.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000

510 ******

Process

209

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

******

PROCESS

X (EASTING)

FILE LISTING

80.28572
71.07143
57.57143
44.28572
35.92857
26.71428
14.07143
84.35714
77.07143
65.92857
57.78571
41.71429
32.71429
24.14286
13.00000

Y (NORTHING)

******

USE

shotpoint num

89.71429
80.07143
66.35715
53.71429
44.50000
35.50000
22.21429
18.78571
26.92857
37.42857
44.28572
60.78571
69.99999
78.35715
90.35714
PROCESS

511 ******

230.00
235.00
240.00
105.00
100.00
210.00
215.00
240.00
245.00
250.00
260.00
105.00
100.00
220.00
230.00
STOP

line
name
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
line2
USE

POINT
SEQUENCE NO.

SEG I.D.
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
2.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000
4.00000
2.00000
1.00000
2.00000
3.00000

512 ******

** NORMAL TERMINATION **

R2003.12.0

Process

210

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

Data
Type
C*24
I

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

FLDMODE

Range Description and Default

C*16

Name of the input file. File must contain X, Y and
Segment ID fields.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Point sequence field mode. The point sequence value is
the number of the point along the segment.
Default Value = CALCULATE ONLY
Options:
CALCULATE ONLY = Use calculated point sequence
numbers.
CALCULATE+SAVE = Use calculated point sequence
numbers. Save the calculated
values in a new field on the
output file.
FIELD NUMBER

R2003.12.0

= Use the point sequence numbers
from the input file. The field
number is given by PTSEQFLD.

XFLD

I

Field number of x field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

SEGIDFLD

I

Field number of Segment ID field in the input file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field in the input file.
Default Value = First Line Name field

PTSEQFLD

I

Field number of the point sequence field in the input file.
Used if FLDMODE = FIELD NUMBER. A 0 (zero) finds
and uses the first occurrence of the correct field type.

TOLERANC

R

Maximum distance to connect lines. If the endpoints of
two segments (adjacent on the file) are within
TOLERANC of each other, the first point of the second
segment is removed and the segments are given the same
Segment ID.
Default Value = 1

Process

211

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Geographic Sort
Name

GEOGRAPHIC SORT

Alternate Name SORT GEOGRAPHIC
Function

This process puts segments of the same line in geographic order.

Example

An example (beginning on page 205) starts with a line file where the
segments of the same line are not sequential on the file. By using the
GEOGRAPHIC SORT, GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT and SORT
processes, the segments are ordered and duplicate endpoints removed.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

• FLDMODE

C*16

XFLD

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Name of the input file. File must contain X, Y, Segment
ID and Line Name fields.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Slope and Distance field mode.
The slope values are all identical and equal to the average
slope of the line. The distance values are the distance each
point is along the slope line from an arbitrary point.
Default Value = CALCULATE ONLY
Options:
CALCULATE
ONLY

= Use calculated slope and distance
values.

CALCULATE+
SAVE

= Use calculated slope and distance
values. Save the calculated values in
new fields on the output file.

FIELD
NUMBER

= Use the slope and distance values
from the input file. The slope field is
given by SLOPEFLD. The distance
field is given by DISTFLD.

Field number of x field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

Process

212

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

YFLD

I

Field number of y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

SEGIDFLD

I

Field number of Segment ID field in the input file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field in the input file.
Default Value = First Line Name field (May be any text
field).

SLOPEFLD

I

Field number of the Slope field in the input file. This is
the average slope of the line. Used if FLDMODE =
FIELD NUMBER.
Default Value = First Slope field

DISTFLD

I

Field number of the Distance field in the input file. This is
the distance each point is along the slope line from an
arbitrary point. Used if FLDMODE = FIELD NUMBER.
Default Value = First Distance field

Process

213

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Graphics File
Name

GRAPHICS FILE

Alternate Name OPEN ZGF
Function

Open a graphics file without opening a picture. This is useful for
creating an empty graphics file for use in processes such as COPY
PICTURE.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file to open.

HEADER

C*80

Header text for the graphics file. Used if NEWZGF =
NEW.
Default Value = Blank

C*4

Whether graphics file is old or new.
Options:

• NEWZGF

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

NEW

= New graphics file

OLD

= Old graphics file

Process

214

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Grid Listing
Name

GRID LISTING

Alternate Name LIST GRID
Function

This process lists the value of a grid, produces a printer contour map of
the grid, or both. Both the listing and the map can be a windowed
portion of the grid.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

HISTDISP

C*16

Range Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Display of grid history information.
Default Value = DO NOT DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY HISTORY = Display file header information.
DO NOT DISPLAY

R2003.12.0

= Do not display header
information.

RMINWIN

I

Minimum row of the grid to display. This specifies the
bottom of the window.
Default Value = 1

RMAXWIN

I

Maximum row of the grid to display This specifies the top
of the window.
Default Value = Last row of the grid

CMINWIN

I

Minimum column of the grid to display. This specifies the
left side of the window.
Default Value = 1

CMAXWIN

I

Maximum column of the grid to display. This specifies
the right side of the window.
Default Value = Last column in the grid

Process

215

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LISTTYPE

C*16

FORMAT

Range Description and Default
Display mode of the grid.
Default Value = GRID LISTING
Options:

C*80

R2003.12.0

= Print only the grid values

PRINTER
CONTOUR

= Print only the printer contour map

BOTH

= Print both the grid values and the
printer contour map

Output format for the grid listing.
Used if LISTTYPE = GRID LISTING.
Default Value = 5(1X,G13.7,2X)

LABLMODE C*20

° NCONTOUR

GRID LISTING

Labeling of rows and columns of the printer listing. Used
if LISTTYPE = GRID LISTING.
Default Value = LABEL ROWS+COLUMNS
Options:
LABEL ROWS+COLUMNS

= Label the rows and
columns

DO NOT LABEL

= Do not label the rows and
columns

I

1–100 Number of printer contour levels to display. Required if
LISTTYPE = PRINTER CONTOUR or BOTH.

NPRINT

I

10–
127

CONMIN

R

Minimum contour value to display. Used if LISTTYPE =
PRINTER CONTOUR or BOTH.
Default Value = Computed from the data

CONINT

R

Contour interval for display. Used if LISTTYPE =
PRINTER CONTOUR or BOTH.
Default Value = Computed from the data

CONMAX

R

Maximum contour value to display. Used if LISTTYPE =
PRINTER CONTOUR or BOTH.
Default Value = Computed from the data

Number of print positions across the top of the printer
contour plot. If this is larger or smaller than the number of
columns in the grid, the printer position values are
interpolated.
Default Value = 75

Process

216

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

REPTUNIT

I

DISKFILE

C*80

Range Description and Default
0–99

FORTRAN logical unit to which the grid listing is
written.
Default Value = 6
Name of the output formatted disk file.
Default Value = Blank

Process

217

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Grid Resampling
Name

GRID RESAMPLING

Alternate Name RESAMPLE GRID
Function

This process takes an input grid with associated faults (optional) and
builds a new grid in which one or all of XINC, YINC, XMIN, XMAX,
YMIN, and YMAX may differ from the input grid. Any portions of the
new grid that do not overlap the input grid are set to ZNON.

Notes

Either XINC and/or YINC and/or some grid limit (XMIN, XMAX,
YMIN, YMAX) must be specified or the program does not know how
the new output grid differs from the original grid.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0

GRIDOUT

C*24

Name of the output grid file.

MFDOUT

I

XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the output gridding area.
Default Value = Match input grid

XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the output gridding area.
Default Value = Match input grid

YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the output gridding area.
Default Value = Match input grid

YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the output gridding area.
Default Value = Match input grid

XINC

R

Output x gridding interval.
Default Value = Match input grid

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1

Process

218

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

YINC

R

Output y gridding interval.
Default Value = Match input grid

ZNON

R

Null data value to use for the output grid.
Default Value = Match input grid

Process

219

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Grid Statistics
Name

GRID STATISTICS

Alternate Name GRID STATS
Function

This process gathers and displays statistics describing a particular grid
file.

Example
****** PROCESS GRIDSTATISTICS USE 1 ******
GRID FILE:
CREATED:
AT:

ZCL LGRD 10
17 NOV 87
15:08

CREATED BY LINE GRIDDING LINE FILE: BACK INTERP 10
DISTANCE EXTRAPOLATED:
TO EDGES
FILTERING:
COMBINATION
REFINEMENTS =
0; PASSES =
10; CUTOFF =
0.2500
NUMBER OF ROWS
=
NUMBER OF COLUMNS
=
NUMBER OF Z-VALUE NODES
=
NUMBER OF ZNON NODES
=
MINIMUM X COORDINATE
=
MAXIMUM X COORDINATE
=
MINIMUM Y COORDINATE
=
MAXIMUM Y COORDINATE
=
X INTERVAL BETWEEN COLUMNS
=
Y INTERVAL BETWEEN ROWS
=
MAXIMUM SURFACE VALUE
=
MINIMUM SURFACE VALUE
=
SURFACE RANGE
=
MEAN OF Z
=
ROOT MEAN SQUARE OF Z
=
STANDARD DEVIATION OF Z
=
RELATIVE VARIATION OF Z
=
ROOT MEAN SQUARE CURVATURE OF Z =
X-DIR. COLLECTION EXPANSION
=
Y-DIR. COLLECTION EXPANSION
=
DATA COLLECTION RADIUS
=
NULL DATA VALUE
=

R2003.12.0

21
23
483
0
197500.00
252500.00
205000.00
255000.00
2500.0000
2500.0000
13589.346
-1366.9922
14956.338
2421.3718
4243.1011
3484.3748
1.4390086
0.16612501E-03
0.00000000E+00
0.00000000E+00
0.00000000E+00
0.10000000E+31

Process

220

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

ZCL can be instructed to write the same grid statistics into a ZCL Data
Block so that other processes can access this information. Create a
Data Block with the ZCL DATA BLOCK Process that contains 24
REAL locations, as in the following example:
DATA:01,00
HOWMANY
/
GRID STATISTICS:01,00

=

24,

GRIDIN
MFDIN
DNUM

DATATYPE
=
=
=

=

’REAL’,

DATASIZE

=

1

’ZCL LGRD 10’,
1,
1
/

By specifying DNUM = 1 in the GRID STATISTICS Process, the user
has specified that DATA BLOCK 1 be filled in the following manner:
Location

R2003.12.0

Information Present

1

Integer representation of number of rows

2

Integer representation of number of columns

3

Number of grid nodes with non-null values

4

Number of grid nodes with null value

5

Minimum x

6

Maximum x

7

Minimum y

8

Maximum y

9

Increment of x

10

Increment of y

11

Minimum z

12

Maximum z

13

Z-range

14

Mean z value

15

Root mean square z value

16

Standard deviation of z values

17

Relative variation of z values

18

Root mean square curvature of z

19

Data collection expansion in x direction (XBAND)

20

Data collection expansion in y direction (YBAND)

21

Data collection radius (REACH)

22

Grid null value (ZNON)

23

Real representation of number of rows

Process

221

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Location

24
Notes

Information Present
Real representation of number of columns

There is a difference between words 1 and 23: Both contain the number
of rows in the grid. Use word 1 for other ZCL processes requiring an
integer as input. Use word 23 for other processes that need a real
number input.
This is also true for the number of columns in the grid; use word 2 for
processes requiring integer input and word 24 for processes requiring
real input.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

DNUM

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid file.
Default Value = 0
Use number of the output DATA BLOCK. The DATA
BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is non-zero and the
specified DATA BLOCK exists.
Default Value = 0

Process

222

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Grid To Data
Name

GRID TO DATA

Alternate Name G TO D
Function

This process converts a grid file to a control point file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

DATAOUT
MFDOUT
FLDNAME

CONVRATE

R2003.12.0

Name of the input grid file.
0–5

C*24
I
C*20

I

ZNONCONV C*8

ZNON

Range Description and Default

R

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the z field to hold the grid node values in the new
control point file.
Default Value = Z VALUE
Rate used to convert the grid values to control points.
Default Value = 1
Transfer or do not transfer ZNON values from the grid
file to the control point file.
Default Value = YESZNONS
Options:
YESZNONS

= Transfer ZNON values

NOZNONS

= Do not transfer ZNONs

Null data value for the output control point file.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

Process

223

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Hand Contour Pnts
Name

HAND CONTOUR PNTS

Alternate Name SEIS SPECIAL PTS
Function

This process assists the interpreter in the contouring by hand of
interpreted seismic data. The process takes care of all the linear
interpolations needed during the contouring.
The input file must be sorted either by line name or by line number and
shotpoint number. The output is a file that contains the data for one
horizon only.
Z-values are found that are evenly divisible by the contour interval.
Shotpoint number and x,y coordinates are interpolated for these
locations. Local minimum and maximum locations are determined and
marked with appropriate codes.
A local minimum location is determined when the value of the
previously observed location and the value of the next observed
location both exceed the value of the intermediate location. Local
maximums are similarly identified.
Fault and other discontinuities are honored.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

DATAOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Name of the input data file.
0–5

C*24

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file.
Default Value = Based on the input data file

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

LOWBOUN
D

R

Lower contour limit below which no contour point is
generated.
Default Value = –20,000

UPBOUND

R

Upper contour limit above which no contour point is
generated.
Default Value = +20,000

Process

224

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Range Description and Default

CONINT

R

MINSYMB

I

0–255 Number of the symbol that appears in the discontinuity
field to indicate that this point is a local minimum.
Default Value = 7

MAXSYMB

I

0–255 Number of the symbol that appears in the discontinuity
field to indicate that this point is a local maximum.
Default Value = 8

RETAIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*4

Contour interval between contour values.
Default Value = 10.00

Retention of endpoints in the output file.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Include endpoints

NO

= Do not include endpoints

CHARSIZE

R

Height of characters, in plotter units (in or cm).
This parameter is used in conjunction with ABSCALE to
avoid overposting. Internally, the minimum space needed
for a character = (CHARSIZE/ABSSCALE)2. If the
distance of a discontinuity is greater than this value, then
there is enough room to label a point without overposting.
Default Value = 0.10 in or 0.25 cm

INFLD

I

Field number of the input z field.
Default Value = First Z Value field

DISCFLD

I

Field number of the input discontinuity field.
Default Value = First Discontinuity field

ABSSCALE

R

Absolute scale.
This parameter is used in conjunction with CHARSIZE to
avoid overposting. Internally, the minimum space needed
for a character = (CHARSIZE/ABSSCALE)2. If the
distance of a discontinuity is greater than this value, then
there is enough room to label a point without overposting
Default Value = 24,000

Process

225

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Hardcopy
Name

HARDCOPY

Alternate Name H CPY
Function

This process creates a Batch Hardcopy Parameter file (HDBPARM),
which is written to disk. If this process is used more than once in a
ZCL run, then the file will contain multiple pictures. This output disk
file can be input to Batch Hardcopy (a separate product) to plot a
picture.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to plot.

• PICTURE

C*80

Name of the picture to plot.

NCOPIES

I

CUTLINE

C*12

• DEVTYPE

SCALFACT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Number of copies to plot.
Default Value = 1
Draw a cutline around the map.
Default Value = CUTLINE
Options:
CUTLINE

= Draw a cutline

NO
CUTLINE

= Do not draw cutline

I

Workstation Type that ZCL is running on. Valid values
for the number can be found in the Workstation
Description File (WDFILE) and are specific to your
installation.
Note: Ask your system personnel for a list of valid
Workstation Types from the WDFILE.

R

Scaling factor for increasing or decreasing the size of the
plotted picture.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

226

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PLOT

C*4

° LGBTYPES

ROTATE

R2003.12.0

I

C*4

Range Description and Default
Graphics features to plot.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= Plot all features present on the PICTURE

YES

= Plot those features supplied by the
LGBTYPES parameter

NO

= Do not plot those features supplied by the
LGBTYPES parameter

Array of up to 40 graphics features to plot.
Not required if PLOT = ALL; at least one is required if
PLOT = YES or NO.
One code number is assigned to each feature, unless all
available types are copied, in which case LGBTYPES =
0. For a complete list of these graphics features, see
“Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes” in the Z-MAP
Plus Reference Manual.
Plot rotation.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES

= Rotate the plot

NO

= Do not rotate the plot

Process

227

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Horizon Penetrate
Name

HORIZON PENETRATE

Alternate Name PENTRATE HORIZON
Function

This process performs deviated well track horizon penetration. It
calculates the x, y, and z coordinates at which deviated well tracks
penetrate one or more gridded surface horizons. The grid files can be
faulted or non-faulted. The results are stored as a control point file that
contains five fields:
X, Y, Z, HORIZON NAME, SYMBOL CODE

Notes

The user can propagate additional fields from the deviated well file that
are not required to define a control point file record.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

I

• FILEOUT

C*24

• GRIDS
MFDGRDS

FAULTS

Range Description and Default

C*24

MFDIN

MFDOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Name of the input deviated well file.
0–5

Name of the output control point file.
0–5

C*24
I

I

SYMBOLS

I

Number of the MFD to contain the output control point
file.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 20 input grid files.

0–5

C*24

MFDFLTS

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

Array of up to 20 numbers of the MFDs that contains the
input grid files, corresponding to position of input grid
files as listed in GRIDS.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 20 input fault files.

0–5

Array of up to 20 number of the MFDs that contains the
input fault files, corresponding to position of input fault
files as listed in FAULTS.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 20 symbol codes (one for each surface),
corresponding to position of input grid files as listed in
GRIDS.
Default Value = 1 – number of grids

Process

228

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SRFNAMS

C*24

Array of up to 20 input surface names, corresponding to
position of input grid files as listed in GRIDS.
Default Value = Grid name

SELECT

C*12

Method used to select other fields on the input deviated
well file for inclusion in the output file. Regardless of the
value of this parameter, all required fields are propagated
to the output control point file.
Default Value = ONLY
Options:

° OUTFLDS

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default

ALL

= Select all other fields on the deviated
well file

SPECIFY

= Select only those fields that are
specified in the OUTFLDS and
METHOD parameters

ONLY

= Select only the required fields that are
propagated to the output file. Discard
all other fields on the deviated well
file.

Array of up to 50 non-required fields to propagate to the
output control point file. Required if SELECT =
SPECIFY.

Process

229

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

METHODS

C*12

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 50 strings defining how to propagate
non-required fields to the output control point file,
corresponding to position of fields listed in OUTFDS.
Used if SELECT = ALL or SPECIFY.
Default Value = COPY, for character fields
or
INTERPOLATE, for numeric fields
Options:
COPY

= Value of field is obtained by
copying the value from the same
field of the point nearest to the
penetration point.

INTERPOLATE

= Value of field is obtained by
interpolating the value from the
points on either side of the
penetration point. If the field is
character and the values on either
side of the penetration point do not
match, the resulting value is
blanked.

XFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

ZFLD

I

Field number of the Depth field in the input file.
Default Value = First Depth field

SEGIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

TRACKFLD

I

Field number of the Well Track field in the input file.
Default Value = First Well Track field

WELLFLD

I

Field number of the Well Name or Platform Identifier
field in the input file.
Default Value = First Well Name of Platform Identifier
field

Process

230

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Import
Name

IMPORT

Alternate Name IMPT
Function

This process transfers a formatted disk file into a member file in a
master file (MFD).
A description of the format of the file being imported must be written
in a Format Group. A Format Group is a group of file and field
descriptions that can be placed on top of the file as a header or placed
in a dictionary with other Format Groups.

Notes

For a complete description of how to set up a Format and transfer files,
see “Appendix D. Import/Export” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference
Manual.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DISKFILE

C*80

Name of the input formatted disk file.

DICTNARY

C*80

Name of the dictionary file (formatted disk file) that
describes the format group used. If no name is specified,
the format group is assumed to be a header on top of the
file named in DISKFILE.
Default Value = Blank

GROUP

C*40

Name of the format group in the dictionary to use. Used if
DICTNARY is supplied.
Default Value = Blank

° LATTNAME C*24

Name of the RESIN lattice that specifies the geometry of
the cell table being imported. Required if importing a cell
table file.

• FILEOUT

Name of the output file.

MFDOUT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

GRPCHAR

C*1

Format group data identifier character.
Default Value = @

CMTCHAR

C*1

Comment data identifier character.
Default Value = !

HISCHAR

C*1

History data identifier character.
Default Value = +

Process

229

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Import CPS File
Name

IMPORT CPS FILE

Alternate Name CPS IMPORT
Function

This process takes a grid or data file from the CPS file by the CPS
SAVE file number and converts it to a grid or data member file on an
MFD.

Valid Combinations for a Data File
Field Type (Form, Data Type Code)
X
X
1

Y
Y
2

Z
Z
I
3

DZ/
DX
AI
4

DZ/
DY
BI
5

DZ2/
DXDY
CI
6

X WEIGHT
DI
7

Y WEIGHT
EI
8

0

C

C

1

C

C

C

2

C

C

C

C

C

3

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

IGR
D

Key
C
IGRD

= Field created for specific type of CPS SAVE file.
= Type of CPS SAVE file format:
0 = degenerate control point (x,y only)
1 = basic control points (SV = 1)
2 = linear expanded control points
3 = quadratic expanded control points

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• CPSFILE

Range Description and Default

C*80

Name of the input CPS SAVE file.

DISKUNIT

I

0–99

SAVENUM

I

1–100 Number of the SAVE file on the disk file, that contains
the CPS data to read.
Default Value = 1

• FILEOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*24

FORTRAN logical unit on which to open the CPS SAVE
file.
Default Value = 11

Name of the output file to import from the CPS SAVE
file. The only type of files that are output are a grid or data
file.

Process

230

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDOUT

I

Range Description and Default
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

Parameters for a Grid File
Parameter
Data Range Description and Default
Name
Type
SPECIFY

C*12

Whether increments or rows and columns are input. Used
if the grid CPS SAVE file is in original format.
Default Value = INCREMENTS
Options:
INCREMENTS

= Increments are specified by XINC
and YINC

ROWS&COLUMNS = Number of rows and columns is
specified by NUMROWS and
NUMCOLS

R2003.12.0

NUMROWS

I

Number of rows for the output grid. Used if SPECIFY =
ROWS&COLUMNS and the CPS SAVE file is in
original format.
Default Value = 1

NUMCOLS

I

Number of columns for the output grid. Used if SPECIFY
= ROWS&COLUMNS and the CPS SAVE file is in
original format.
Default Value = 1

XINC

R

Increment of x for the output grid. Used if SPECIFY =
INCREMENTS and the CPS SAVE file is in original
format.
Default Value = 1.0

YINC

R

Increment of y for the output grid. Used if SPECIFY =
INCREMENTS and the CPS SAVE file is in original
format.
Default Value = 1.0

° XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate for the output grid. Required if the
CPS SAVE file is in original format.

° XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate for the output grid. Required if the
CPS SAVE file is in original format.

° YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate for the output grid. Required if the
CPS SAVE file is in original format.

Process

231

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate for the output grid. Required if the
CPS SAVE file is in original format.

ZNON

R

Null data value for output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

Parameters for a Data File

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FLDNAMS

C*20

Array of up to 50 field names for the fields being created.
If blank, then they are defaulted to the field type
generated from the CPS SAVE file header. See “Valid
Combinations” on page 230.
Default Value = Based on the CPS SAVE file type

FORMATS

C*8

Array of up to 50 FORTRAN formats for the fields being
created, corresponding to position of field as listed in
FLDNAME.
Note: The formats must be correct for outputting the
data.
Default Value = G15.7

FLDTYPS

I

Array of up to 50 field types for the fields being created,
corresponding to position of field as listed in FLDNAMS.
A zero causes the field type to default based on the CPS
SAVE file format. See “Valid Combinations” on
page 230.
Default Value = Based on the CPS SAVE file type.

ZNONS

R

Array of up to 50 null data values for the fields being
created, corresponding to position of field as listed in
FLDNAMS.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

Process

232

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Import ZGF File
Name

IMPORT ZGF FILE

Alternate Name ZGF IMPORT
Function

This process imports a neutral graphics disk file to a Z-MAP Graphics
File (ZGF).

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• DISKFILE

C*80

Name of the input neutral graphics disk file that contains
the pictures to import.

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the output graphics file to contain the pictures.

REPORT

C*4

Status report production.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Status report produced

NO

= No status report produced

ZGFUNIT

I

0–99

FORTRAN logical unit to use for the output graphics file.
Default Value = 27

DISKUNIT

I

0–99

FORTRAN logical unit to use for the input neutral
graphics disk file.
Default Value = 10

Process

233

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Isometric Picture
Name

ISOMETRIC PICTURE

Alternate Name FISHNET PICTURE
Function

This process opens a graphics file and 3D picture ready to receive
graphics from the ISOMETRIC PLOT Process. The picture size is set
to 16 in or 90 cm square.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to
open.
This picture receives information from or can be
displayed by other ZCL processes.

HEADER

C*80

Header text for the graphics file. Used if the graphics file
is new.
Default Value = Blank

C*3

Type of graphics file (old or new).
Options:

• NEWZGF

• PICTURE

R2003.12.0

C*80

Range Description and Default

NEW

= New graphics file

OLD

= Old graphics file

Name of the picture file to create.

XLMARGIN

R

Plot margin to the left of the map, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

XRMARGIN

R

Plot margin to the right of the map, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

YBMARGIN

R

Plot margin below the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

YTMARGIN

R

Plot margin above the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

Process

234

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Isometric Plot
Name

ISOMETRIC PLOT

Alternate Name FISHNET PLOT
Function

This process draws an isometric fishnet on a picture created by the
ISOMETRIC PICTURE Process.

Notes

The ISOMETRIC PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a
graphics file and picture before this process is called.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN
MFDIN

Data
Type
C*24
I

NULLVALU C*16

Range Description and Default
Grid
files
0–5

Name of the input grid file used to draw in fishnet.
Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Use of ZNONs in the plot.
Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY = Display a value at a ZNON location
DO NOT = Do not display a value at a ZNON
DISPLAY
location

SKIRT

C*16

Use of a skirt in the plot.
Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY = Display a skirt
DO NOT = Do not display a skirt
DISPLAY

DIRECTON

R2003.12.0

C*8

Direction(s) in which to draw fishnet.
Default Value = X AND Y
Options:
X ONLY

= Draw the fishnet in the x direction only

Y ONLY

= Draw the fishnet in the y direction only

X AND Y

= Draw the fishnet in both directions

NEITHER

= Do not draw a fishnet

Process

235

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
SURFACE

LABLAXES

Data
Type
C*12

C*12

Range Description and Default
Surface(s) to draw.
Default Value = UPPER ONLY
Options:
UPPER ONLY

= Draw the upper surface only

LOWER
ONLY

= Draw the lower surface only

BOTH

= Draw both surfaces

Axes to label.
Default Value = ALL THREE
Options:
NO LABELS = No labels on the axes
Z ONLY

= Label just the z axis

X AND Y

= Label just the x and y axes

ALL THREE = Label all three axes

WINDOW

R2003.12.0

C*16

STARTCOL

I

ENDCOL

I

STARTROW

I

ENDROW

I

Whether to window the grid.
Default Value = DO NOT WINDOW
Options:
WINDOW

= Window the grid

DO NOT WINDOW

= Display the whole grid

First column to plot. Used if WINDOW = WINDOW.
Default Value = 1
Last column to plot. Used if WINDOW = WINDOW.
Default Value = Number of columns in grid
First row to plot. Used if WINDOW = WINDOW.
Default Value = 1
Last row to plot. Used if WINDOW = WINDOW.
Default Value = Number of rows in grid

Process

236

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Data
Name
Type
XLABLFMT C*12

XDECIMAL

I

XTICKS

I

XLBLSTRT

R

XLBLINC

R

XLBLEND

R

XLBLHGHT

R

YLABLFMT C*12

R2003.12.0

YDECIMAL

I

YTICKS

I

YLBLSTRT

R

Range Description and Default
Format to use when labeling the x axis.
Default Value = Based on data
Options:
DECIMAL

= Use decimal notation

SCIENTIFIC

= Use scientific notation

INTEGER

= Use integer notation

Number of places to the right of the decimal if
XLABLFMT = DECIMAL or SCIENTIFIC.
Default Value = Based on data
Number of tick marks between labels on the x axis.
Default Value = Based on data
Starting x label value, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Increment between labels on the x axis, in engineering
units.
Default Value = Based on data
Ending x label value, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Height of the x labels, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Format to use when labeling the y axis.
Default Value = Based on data
Options:
DECIMAL

= Use decimal notation

SCIENTIFIC

= Use scientific notation

INTEGER

= Use integer notation

Number of places to the right of the decimal if
YLABLFMT = DECIMAL or SCIENTIFIC.
Default Value = Based on data
Number of tick marks between labels on the y axis.
Default Value = Based on data
Starting y label value, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data

Process

237

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
YLBLINC

Data
Type
R

YLBLEND

R

YLBLHGHT

R

ZLABLFMT C*12

Range Description and Default
Increment between labels on the y axis, in engineering
units.
Default Value = Based on data
Ending y label value, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Height of the y labels, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Format to use when labeling the z axis.
Default Value = Based on data
Options:
DECIMAL

= Use decimal notation

SCIENTIFIC = Use scientific notation
INTEGER

R2003.12.0

ZDECIMAL

I

ZTICKS

I

ZLBLSTRT

R

ZLBLINC

R

ZLBLEND

R

ZLBLHGHT

R

ZSUBVALU

R

SKRTVALU

R

XREF

R

= Use integer notation

Number of places to the right of the decimal if
ZLABLFMT = DECIMAL or SCIENTIFIC.
Default Value = Based on data
Number of tick marks between labels on the z axis.
Default Value = Based on data
Starting z label value, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Increment between labels on the z axis in engineering
units.
Default Value = Based on data
Ending z label value, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Height of the z labels, in engineering units.
Default Value = Based on data
Substitute value to plot at ZNONs, if NULLVALU =
DISPLAY.
Default Value = ZNON value
Level of the skirt if one is being drawn.
Default Value = ZMIN
Value of x for the reference point.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * (XMAX + XMIN) of the input
grid

Process

238

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
YREF

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
R

ZREF

R

AZIMUTH

R

ANGLE

R

RANGE

R

XSCALE

R

YSCALE

R

ZSCALE

R

LINCLR

I

LABCLR

I

AXISCLR

I

Range Description and Default
Value of y for the reference point.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * (YMAX + YMIN) of the input
grid
Value of z for the reference point.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * (ZMAX + ZMIN) of the input grid
0.0–
360.0

Horizontal angle measured clockwise from the y axis, in
degrees.
Default Value = 225
–90.0 Angle above or below the reference point.
through Default Value = 30
90.0
Viewing location is this distance from the point (XREF,
YREF, ZREF).
Default Value = 8 * largest grid dimension
Scale factor in the x direction relative to y and z.
Default Value = 1
Scale factor in the y direction relative to x and z.
Default Value = 1
Scale factor in the z direction relative to x and y.
Default Value = Based on data
0–255 Color index of the mesh lines.
Default Value = Based on color table
0–255 Color index of the labels.
Default Value = Based on color table
0–255 Color index of the axis lines.
Default Value = Based on color table

Process

239

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Label Lat/Long
Name

LABEL LAT/LONG

Alternate Name LAB L
Function

This process draws labels, grid lines and grid ticks from latitude/
longitude input.

Notes

The PROJECTION and PICTURE Processes must be used to set
latitude/longitude coordinates and create or open a graphics file and
picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
SLMINDEG

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
–90

Left/right side minimum labeling value, in degrees.

through Default Value = Minimum latitude of the current picture,

90
SLMINMIN

I

–59

in degrees
Left/right side minimum labeling value, in minutes.

through Default Value = Minimum latitude of the current picture,

59
SLMINSEC

I

–59

in minutes
Left/right side minimum labeling value, in seconds.

through Default Value = Minimum latitude of the current picture,

59
SLINCDEG

I

SLINCMIN

I

in seconds

0–360 Left/right side labeling interval, in degrees.
Default Value = Range in latitude divided by 10
–59

Left/right side labeling interval, in minutes.

through Default Value = Range in latitude divided by 10

59
SLINCSEC

I

–59

Left/right side labeling interval, in seconds.

through Default Value = Range in latitude divided by 10

59
TLMINDEG

I

–180

Top/bottom minimum labeling value, in degrees.

through Default Value = Minimum longitude of the current

180
TLMINMIN

I

–59

picture, in degrees
Top/bottom minimum labeling value, in minutes.

through Default Value = Minimum longitude of the current

59

R2003.12.0

picture, in minutes

Process

240

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TLMINSEC

I

Range Description and Default
–59

Top/bottom minimum labeling value, in seconds.

through Default Value = Minimum longitude of the current

TLINCDEG

I

TLINCMIN

I

59
picture, in seconds
0–360 Top/bottom labeling interval, in degrees.
Default Value = Range of longitude divided by 10
–59

Top/bottom labeling interval, in minutes.

through Default Value = Range of longitude divided by 10

59
TLINCSEC

I

–59

Top/bottom labeling interval, in seconds.

through Default Value = Range of longitude divided by 10

59
LABLMODE C*12

LABLSIDE

R2003.12.0

C*12

Labeling mode.
Default Value = LABELS
Options:
TICKS

= Grid ticks only

LINES

= Grid lines only

LABELS

= Labels only

LABELS+LINES

= Labels and associated grid lines

LABELS+TICKS

= Labels and associated grid ticks

Map sides to label.
Default Value = ALL SIDES
Options:
LEFT+BOTTOM

= Labels along the bottom and left
side

LEFT+TOP

= Labels along the top and left side

RIGHT+BOTTOM

= Labels along the bottom and right
side

RIGHT+TOP

= Labels along the top and right side

ALL SIDES

= Labels on all sides

Process

241

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABLFORM C*12

NTMIDTIC

I

LABLTANG C*12

Range Description and Default
Format of the label.
Default Value = DEG+MIN
Options:
DEG+MIN

= Degrees and minutes

DEG+MIN+SEC

= Degrees, minutes and seconds

Number of top/bottom mid-interval ticks, the small ticks
between labeled ticks.
Default Value = 0
Relationship of top/bottom labels to the border.
Default Value = PAR-BORDER
Options:
PER-LINE

= Perpendicular to the grid line being
labeled

PAR-LINE

= Parallel to the grid line being labeled

PAR-BORDER = Parallel to the border
PER-BORDER = Perpendicular to the border

NSMIDTIC

I

LABLSANG C*12

CHARSIZE

R2003.12.0

R

Number of left/right mid-interval ticks (the small ticks
between labeled ticks).
Default Value = 0
Relationship of right/left side labels to the border.
Default Value = PER-BORDER
Options:
PER-LINE

= Perpendicular to the grid line being
labeled

PAR-LINE

= Parallel to the grid line being labeled

PAR-BORDER

= Parallel to the border

PER-BORDER

= Perpendicular to the border

Height of characters, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Process

242

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

BTICKLEN

R

BRDRTICK

C*16

GTICKLEN

R

GRIDLINE

C*8

LINEWGHT

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Length of border tick, in plotter units (in or cm). If the
border ticks are drawn both inside and outside the border,
their combined length is twice this value.
Default Value = 0.2 in or 0.5 cm
Placement of border ticks, relative to border.
Default Value = OUTSIDE
Options:
INSIDE

= Inside the border

OUTSIDE

= Outside the border

OUTSIDE+INSIDE

= Through the border, both
inside and outside

Grid tick length, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.5 in or 1.5 cm
Type of grid line to draw.
Default Value = SOLID
Options:

1–8

SOLID

= Normal solid grid lines

DASHED

= Dashed grid lines

BOLD

= Bold grid lines

Bold line width for grid lines in terms of plain line widths.
Used if GRIDLINE = BOLD.
Default Value = 2

Process

243

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Label N/E
Name

LABEL N/E

Alternate Name LAB N
Function

This process draws labels, grid lines, and grid ticks from Northing/
Easting coordinates (x and y). It can also be used to label the borders of
a cross-section picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TMINVAL

R

Top/bottom minimum value to label.
Default Value = Minimum x of current picture

TINCR

R

Top/bottom labeling increment.
Default Value = Approximately 10 labels

SMINVAL

R

Left/right side minimum value to label.
Default Value = Minimum y of current picture

SINCR

R

Left/right side labeling increment.
Default Value = Approximately 10 labels

LABLMODE C*12

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Label mode.
Default Value = LABELS
Options:
TICKS

= Grid ticks only

LINES

= Grid lines only

LABELS

= Labels only

LABELS+LINES

= Labels and associated grid lines

LABELS+TICKS

= Labels and associated grid ticks

Process

244

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABLSIDE

C*12

Range Description and Default
Map sides to label.
Default Value = ALL SIDES
Options:

LABLFORM C*16

R2003.12.0

NUMDECS

I

NTMIDTIC

I

LEFT+BOTTOM

= Labels along the bottom and
left side

LEFT+TOP

= Labels along the top and left
side

RIGHT+BOTTOM

= Labels along the bottom and
right side

RIGHT+TOP

= Labels along the top and right
side

ALL SIDES

= Labels on all sides

Format of the labels.
Default Value = COMMAS
Options:

0–10

COMMAS

= Integer with commas

NO COMMAS

= Integer without commas

SCIENTIFIC

= Scientific Notation

FLOATING
POINT

= Real number with floating decimal
point

Number of decimal places used if LABLFORM =
SCIENTIFIC or FLOATING POINT.
Default Value = 0
Number of top/bottom mid-interval ticks, the small ticks
between labeled ticks.
Default Value = 1

Process

245

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABLTANG C*12

Relationship of top/bottom labels to the border.
Default Value = PAR-BORDER
Options:
PER-LINE

= Perpendicular to the grid line being
labeled

PAR-LINE

= Parallel to the grid line being
labeled

PAR-BORDER

= Parallel to the border

PER-BORDER

= Perpendicular to the border

TSCALE

R

Scale factor to use for multiplying the top/bottom label
value (for example, 2.54 to convert inches to centimeters).
Default Value = 1.0

TBIAS

R

Bias factor to add to the top/bottom label value (after
scaling).
Default Value = 0

NSMIDTIC

I

Number of left/right mid-interval ticks (the small ticks
between labeled ticks).
Default Value = 1

LABLSANG C*12

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Relationship of right/left side labels to the border.
Default Value = PER-BORDER
Options:
PER-LINE

= Perpendicular to the grid line being
labeled

PAR-LINE

= Parallel to the grid line being labeled

PAR-BORDER

= Parallel to the border

PER-BORDER

= Perpendicular to the border

SSCALE

R

Scale factor for multiplying the right/left side label value
(for example, 2.54 to convert inches to centimeters).
Default Value = 1.0

SBIAS

R

Bias factor to add to the right/left side label value (after
scaling).
Default Value = 0

Process

246

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

CHARSIZE

R

Height of characters, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

BTICKLEN

R

Length of border tick, in plotter units (in or cm). If the
border ticks are drawn both inside and outside the border,
their combined length is twice this value.
Default Value = 0.2 in or 0.5 cm

BRDRTICK

C*16

Placement of border ticks, relative to border.
Default Value = INSIDE
Options:
INSIDE

= Inside the border

OUTSIDE

= Outside the border

OUTSIDE+INSIDE = Through the border, both inside
and outside

GTICKLEN

R

GRIDLINE

C*8

LINEWGHT

R2003.12.0

I

Grid tick length, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.5 in or 1.5 cm
Type of grid line to draw.
Default Value = SOLID
Options:

1–8

SOLID

= Normal solid grid lines

DASHED

= Dashed grid lines

BOLD

= Bold grid lines

Bold line width for grid lines in terms of plain line widths.
Used if GRIDLINE = BOLD.
Default Value = 2

Process

247

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Label XSEC
Name

LABEL XSEC

Alternate Name LAB X
Function

This process posts control point information about a cross-section
display. It draws cross-section profiles along a user-specified baseline.
Multiple grids and fault files can be used to create this display.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and cross-section picture before this process is used.
The LABEL N/E Process can be used to label the borders of a
cross-section picture.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LINEIN

C*24

MFDLINE
• DATAIN

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input vertex file that contains the
cross-section baseline.
Default Value = File used in PICTURE Process if
PICTYPE = CROSS SECTION
0–5

C*24

Number of the MFD that contains the baseline vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input control point file.

MFDDATA

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0

LINENUM

R

Line number in the baseline vertex file to use for
cross-section display.
Default Value = 1.0

BANDWDTH

R

Width of a band around the baseline inside which control
points are posted. This band arcs around the end of the
line, used as a radius.
Default Value = For a grid, 1 ⁄ 2 MIN (x range, y range)
or
500.0, otherwise

Process

248

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

INFLD

I

Array of up to 10 z field numbers. These z field values
designate the position for posting a symbol and either that
value or a label (LBLFLD).
All of the field values specified by the LABLIN
parameters are posted above the INFLD position. If the
INFLD value is ZNON, then its associated label is not
posted.
Default Value = First Z Value field

LABLIN

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers of the fields whose
contents are posted above each INFLD symbol. Each
LABLIN value is posted one below the other with the first
on top.
Default Value = 0

LABLFLD

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers of the fields whose
contents are posted at the position. If INFLD value is also
posted, this field’s value is posted above.
Default Value = 0

LABLFORM C*12

Orientation of all posted labels.
Default Value = HORIZONTAL
Options:
HORIZONTAL = Parallel to the baseline
VERTICAL

LABLTYPE

C*8

= Perpendicular to the baseline

Type of labels, either field values plus field names or
values only.
Default Value = NO NAME
Options:
NAME = Control points are labeled with field names as
well as field values
NO
= Control points are labeled with field values only
NAME

LABLHGHT
ZPOST

R2003.12.0

R
C*16

Height of labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Posting of z value labels for the INFLD fields.
Default Value = ZVALUE LABELS
Options:
ZVALUE LABELS

= Display the z value

NO ZVALUE LABELS

= Do not display z values

Process

249

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Lattice To Cell
Name

LATTICE TO CELL

Alternate Name CONVERT LAT TO CELL
Function

This process converts a RESIN lattice to a cell table.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• LATTICE

C*24

MFDIN

I

• CELLFILE

C*24

MFDOUT

I

CELLTYPE

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*8

Range Description and Default
Name of the lattice file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the lattice file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the resulting cell table.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output cell table.
Default Value = 1
Type of cell table.
Default Value = BLOCK
Options:
BLOCK

= For a block-centered lattice

POINT

= For a point-centered lattice

Process

250

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

LGB Defaults
Name

LGB DEFAULTS

Alternate Name LGBDEF
Function

Example

Set default color indices for an LGB type. This is the only way to
control colors for posting processes that do not have color parameters
(e.g., the TITLE BLOCK Process).
This ZCL card deck demonstrates some uses of LGB DEFAULTS:
PICTURE:10
ZGFNAME = ’IDM.ZGF’,
NEWZGF
= ’NEW’,
PICTURE = ’IDM_PICTURE’,
NEWPICT = ’NEW’,
AOISRCE = ’USER’,
AOITYPE = ’XY’,
XMIN
= 285100.0000,
XMAX
= 302500.0000,
YMIN
= 4671500.0000,
YMAX
= 4692000.0000,
PICTYPE = ’BASEMAP’,
SCALTYPE = ’UNITSPERINCH’,
DATUNITS = ’FEET’,
E
!
! Draw a border in color index 10. (Borders are normally drawn in
! color index 2.)
!
LGB DEFAULTS:
LGBTYPE = 1,
LINECOLR = 10 /
!
BORDER:
LINETYPE = ’BOLD’,
LINEWGHT = 2 /
!
! Draw border labels with a text color index of 2. (Since we did not
! specify a line color, it defaults to 1.) (Default line and text color
! is normally 5.)
!
LGB DEFAULTS:
LGBTYPE = 2,
TEXTCOLR = 2 /
!
LABEL N/E: /

R2003.12.0

Process

251

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

!
! Draw a north arrow with a line color of 8 and a marker color of 9.
!
LGB DEFAULTS:
LGBTYPE = 10,
LINECOLR = 8,
MARKCOLR = 9 /
!
NORTH ARROW: /
E
!
! Exercise the error checking.
!
LGB DEFAULTS:
LGBTYPE = 1,
LINECOLR = -1,
TEXTCOLR = 256,
MARKCOLR = 5 /
E
!
STOP:
/ 9999

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• LGBTYPE

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
Graphics feature (LGB) type. For a list of graphics feature
types, see “Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes” in the
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.

TEXTCOLR

I

0–255 Text color index.
Default Value = 1

LINECOLR

I

0–255 Line color index.
Default Value = 1

MARKCOLR

I

0–255 Marker (symbol) color index.
Default Value = 1

FILLCOLR

I

0–255 Fill color index.
Default Value = 1

Process

252

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Line Generalize
Name

LINE GENERALIZE

Alternate Name LINE GEN
Function

This process reduces the number of data points in linear cartographic
features. As the data is thinned, the features are redefined so that they
contain fewer points, yet maintain the important characteristics of their
original shape. The resulting output file requires less storage space and
processing time is reduced.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

I

C*24

MFDOUT

I

METHOD

INFLD

Range Description and Default

C*24

FILEOUT

REPORT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*8

C*16

I

Name of the input file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No report

PARTIAL

= Summary report

FULL

= Full report

Line generalization algorithm.
Default Value = DOUGLAS-POIKER
Options:
DOUGLAS-POIKER

= Douglas-Poiker method

WILLIAMS

= Williams method

Field number of the z field on the input file. Used if the
input file contains seismic or profile data.
Default Value = First Z Value field

Process

253

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

SEGIDFLD

I

Field number of Segment ID field on the input file. Used
if the input file contains vertex, fault or profile data.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field on the input file.
Default Value = First Line Name field

HORNMFLD

I

Field number of the Horizon Name field on the input file.
Default Value = First Horizon Name field

TOLERANC

R

Line generalization tolerance. The generalization
tolerance is a user-defined threshold value that is
measured in the same units as the data.
For three points, if the center point is closer than this
distance from a line connecting the two endpoints, then
the center point is deleted.
Default Value = Calculated

Process

254

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Line Gridding
Name

LINE GRIDDING

Alternate Name L GRD
Function

This process builds a grid using line data (seismic, gravity or other
line-oriented data) and a special algorithm that takes advantage of the
format of the data.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• LINEIN

Data
Type
C*24

MFDIN

I

LINZFLD

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

I

MAKECUTS C*16

° GRIDOUT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*24

Name of the input line file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input line data.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the z field in line file to grid.
Default Value = First Z Value field
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
What to create and/or save by this process.
If faults are used, then the program must cut the input
lines where they cross the faults and store them for use in
the initial gridding process.
Default Value = CUT+NOSAVE+GRID
Options:
CUT+SAVE+GRID

= Cut and save the lines; create
a grid

CUT+SAVE+NOGRID

= Cut and save the lines; do not
create a grid

CUT+NOSAVE+GRID

= Cut, but do not save the lines;
create a grid

ALREADY CUT

= Lines are already cut; create
a grid

Name of the output grid file. Required if MAKECUTS is
not equal to CUT+SAVE+NOGRID.

Process

255

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDOUT

I

° LINECUT

Range Description and Default
0–5

C*24

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output line file created by cutting the original
file with the faults. Required if MAKECUTS =
CUT+SAVE+GRID or CUT+SAVE+NOGRID.

MFDCUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output line cut file.
Default Value = 1

XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum x value of the data

XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum x value of the data

YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum y value of the data

YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum y value of the data

XINC

R

Increment of x of the grid to create.
Default Value = Round number based on:
( XMAX – XMIN ) × ( YMAX – YMIN )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------( 8 × number of points )

R2003.12.0

YINC

R

Increment of y of the grid to create.
Default Value = XINC

ZMIN

R

Minimum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = –1.0E+30

ZMAX

R

Maximum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

ZNON

R

Null data value to use for the output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

Process

256

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

REACH

R

SEPARATE

R

EXTRAP

R

EXTRAPLT

C*12

Range Description and Default
Data collection radius for line endpoints and control
points if a control point file is specified. Points beyond
this distance are not used to calculate the value of the
node.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * grid diagonal
Distance in engineering units that controls interpretation
of line data.
If consecutive points on a line are more than SEPARATE
apart, the line is assumed to end at the first point and a
new line starts at the second point.
Default Value = 10 * x grid increment
Distance in engineering units away from the data in the x
direction within which grid node values can be calculated.
Beyond this distance, grid nodes are assigned ZNONs.
Default Value = 2 * Grid increment
Extent of extrapolation to a specified distance or to the
edge of the grid.
Default Value = GRID EDGES
Options:
X-DISTANCE = Extrapolate to distance expressed in
EXTRAP
GRID EDGES = Extrapolate to edges of grid

FLEXTYPE

R2003.12.0

C*12

Type of grid flexing algorithm to use.
Default Value = BIHARMONIC
Options:
BIHARMONIC

= Biharmonic flexing

LAPLACIAN

= Laplacian flexing

COMBINATION

= Combination of Biharmonic and
Laplacian

NONE

= No flexing is desired

Process

257

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Range Description and Default

CUTOFF

R

Termination criterion for grid flexing.
This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates when the change is less than
CUTOFF, and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Default Value = 0.25

REFINE

I

Number of times to refine the grid between passes of the
flexing filter; used only if FLEXTYPE is not equal to
NONE.
Each refinement halves the grid increments and
interpolates intermediate grid values. The order of
refining is flex, refine, flex, refine, . . ., flex.
Default Value = 0

FLEXCTRL

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*16

NUMPASS

I

SMOOTH

R

Method for terminating flexing.
Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur
NUMPASS times without regard
to CUTOFF.

FLEX<=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur a
maximum of NUMPASS times.
A grid curvature change of less
than CUTOFF terminates flexing.

Maximum number of flexing passes.
If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10
0.0–
1.0

Smoothing modulus is a trade-off between smoothing and
honoring the data during flexing.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original grid,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original grid.
Default Value = 0.5

Process

258

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FLEXSEIS

C*16

Use of input seismic data when flexing.
Default Value = SEISMIC USED
Options:
SEISMIC
UNUSED

= Line gridding created control points
not used in flexing.

SEISMIC USED

= Line gridding created control points
used in flexing. Used if
FLEXTYPE is not equal to NONE.

UPBIAS

R

Value to add to the input grid to form the upper limit grid.
Default Value = 0.0

LOBIAS

R

Negative value to add to the input grid to form the lower
limit grid.
Default Value = 0.0

UPSCALE

R

Value to multiply the input grid to form the upper limit
grid.
Default Value = 1.0

LOSCALE

R

Negative value to multiply the input grid to form the
lower limit grid.
Default Value = 1.0
Name of the input control point file.
Default Value = Blank

DATAIN

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*24

MFDDATA

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0

PNTZFLD

I

Field number of the z field in the control point file to use
when flexing.
Default Value = First Z Value field

LINXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in line file.
Default Value = First X field

LINYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in line file.
Default Value = First Y field

LINIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in line file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

Process

259

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FLTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

PNTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the control point file.
Default Value = First X field

PNTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the control point file.
Default Value = First Y field

Process

260

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Line Gridding Plus
Name

LINEGRIDPLUS

Alternate Name LGDP
Function

Line Gridding Plus provides all the functionality available in classic
Line Gridding and supports new features present in Point Gridding
Plus. Line Gridding Plus honors your input fault geometry data to
create more accurate horizon models than can be provided by the
classic Line Gridding module. Used in combination with Profile
Contouring, Line Gridding Plus generates high quality maps of faulted
surfaces.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• LINEIN
MFDIN

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

CONGRID

C*24

MFDCON

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

FLTPOLY

C*24

MFDPOLY

I

GRIDOUT

C*24

Name of the input line file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input line data.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input control grid.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the control grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of input pre-computed fault polygon file for fault
face blanking and creation of fault face filled grid, to use
in place of program computed fault polygon file.
Note: Only one of the two parameters EXPFTOUT or
FLTPOLY can be nonblank during a single run.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault polygon
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid. This grid ties to the center line
fault traces.

Process

261

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDOUT

I

INTFTOUT

C*24

MFDINTFT

I

Range Description and Default
0–5

Name of the output center line fault file that has had any
ZNONs in the throw and/or dip angle fields replaced by
linearly interpolated values.
In order to output this file, the input fault file must have a
throw and/or dip angle field used to compute heave or a
heave field.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

BLKGROUT C*24

R2003.12.0

MFDBLKGR

I

EXPFTOUT

C*24

MFDEXPFT

I

FILGROUT

C*24

MFDFILGR

I

Number of the MFD that contains the output grid that
matches the center line fault traces.
Default Value = 1

Number of the MFD to contain the output regular (center
line) fault file with any ZNONs replaced in the throw and/
or dip angle fields.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output grid that has been modified so that the
surface is blanked inside the expanded fault zones.
In order to output this file, the input center line fault file
must contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid that is
blanked inside the expanded fault zone.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output expanded fault file. In order to output
this file, the input center line fault file must contain both a
throw and a dip angle field.
Note: Only one of the two parameters EXPFTOUT or
FLTPOLY can be nonblank during a single run.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the expanded fault file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output grid that has been modified so that the
surface inside the expanded fault zone is defined
according to the throw and dip information.
In order to output this file, the center line fault file must
contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid with a
defined surface inside the expanded fault zone.
Default Value = 1

Process

262

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PROFOUT

C*24

MFDPROF

I

HULLFILE

C*24

MFDHULL

I

° LINECUT

MFDCUT

Name of the output data file that contains profiles along
the expanded fault traces.
In order to output this file, the input fault file must have a
throw and/or dip angle field used to compute heave or a
heave field.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

I
C*24

MFDDOUT

I
C*16

Number of the MFD to contain the output profile data file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the optional output file to contain the polygon(s)
bounding the grid nodes that are assigned values during
gridding.
Used only if DATAHULL = CONVEX HULL,
CONCAVE HULL 1 or CONCAVE HULL 2.
Creates a VERT type file.

0–5

C*24

DATAOUT

METHOD

Range Description and Default

Number of the MFD to contain the output data hull file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output line file created by cutting the original
file with the faults. Required if MAKECUTS =
CUT+SAVE+GRID or CUT+SAVE+NOGRID.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output line cut file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output data file to contain the data actually
used to create the grid. The content varies depending on
the type of gridding.
For example, in isopach gridding data points in input data
file with zero (0) value appear in output data file with
program computed negative values. In projected slope
gridding, output data file includes calculated fields
holding DZ/DX and DZ/DY. In all cases, input data
points with null values and data points too far outside the
extrapolated grid AOI are eliminated.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid data file.
Default Value = 1
Gridding method.
Default Value = LEAST SQUARES
Options:
LEAST SQUARES
ISOPACH

R2003.12.0

= Moving least squares
= Isopach

Process

263

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

REPORT

C*8

Range Description and Default
Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE
PARTIAL
FULL

MAKECUTS C*16

R2003.12.0

= No report
= Summary report
= Full report

What to create and/or save by this process.
If faults are used, then the program must cut the input
lines where they cross the faults and store them for use in
the initial gridding process.
Default Value = CUT+NOSAVE+GRID
Options:
CUT+SAVE+GRID

= Cut and save the lines; create
a grid

CUT+SAVE+NOGRID

= Cut and save the lines; do not
create a grid

CUT+NOSAVE+GRID

= Cut, but do not save the lines;
create a grid

ALREADY CUT

= Lines are already cut; create
a grid

Process

264

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONTROL

C*16

Range Description and Default
Type of control grid. Default grid AOI and grid
increments for the output grid are set to those of the
control grid used.
If CONTROL=DEFAULT AOI, the parameters REACH,
XEXPAND and YEXPAND are also defaulted to those of
the control grid.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE
= No control grid used.
DEFAULT AOI = Default the output grid AOI, grid
increments, XEXPAND, YEXPAND,
REACH, and EXTRAP to those of the
control grid.
GRID ZNONS = Any ZNON grid nodes in the control grid
are replaced by values determined using:
• specified gridding parameters
• input control points
• faults
No non-ZNON grid nodes are altered.
GRID
= Any non-ZNON grid nodes in the control
NON-ZNONS
grid are replaced by values determined
using:
• specified gridding parameters
• input control points
• faults
No ZNON grid nodes are altered.

R2003.12.0

XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum x value of the data

XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum x value of the data

YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum y value of the data

YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum y value of the data

Process

265

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
XINC

Data
Type
R

Range Description and Default
Increment of x of the grid to create.
Default Value = Round number based on:
( XMAX – XMIN ) × ( YMAX – YMIN )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------( 8 × number of points )

R2003.12.0

YINC

R

Increment of y of the grid to create.
Default Value = XINC

ZMIN

R

Minimum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = –1.0E+30

ZMAX

R

Maximum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

ZNON

R

Null data value to use for the output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

SEPARATE

R

Distance in engineering units that controls interpretation
of line data.
If consecutive points on a line are more than SEPARATE
apart, the line is assumed to end at the first point and a
new line starts at the second point.
Default Value = 10 * x grid increment

REACH

R

Data collection radius for line endpoints and control
points if a control point file is specified. Points beyond
this distance are not used to calculate the value of the
node.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * grid diagonal

° RADIUS

R

Radius of a ball rolled around the convex hull of the input
data to determine concavities of that hull. Required if
DATAHULL = CONCAVE HULL 1 or CONCAVE
HULL 2.

EXTRAP

R

Distance in engineering units away from the data in the x
direction within which grid node values can be calculated.
Beyond this distance, grid nodes are assigned ZNONs.
Default Value = 2 * Grid increment

Process

266

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

EXTRAPLT

C*12

Range Description and Default
Extent of extrapolation to a specified distance or to the
edge of the grid.
Default Value = GRID EDGES
Options:
X-DISTANCE = Extrapolate to distance expressed in
EXTRAP
GRID EDGES = Extrapolate to edges of grid

DATAHULL

Algorithm used to determine which grid nodes get
initialized.
Default Value = DATA DISTRIBUTION
Options:
DATA
= Choice of nodes to initialize depends on
DISTRIBUTION satisfying general parameters such as
number of points within reach, number
of points, per octant, etc.; this method is
similar to that used in old point
gridding
CONVEX
= Compute the convex hull of the data,
HULL
expand that hull by EXTRAP, and grid
all nodes inside the expanded hull that
are within REACH of at least one data
point
CONCAVE
= Compute the convex hull of the data,
HULL 1
determine small concavities in that hull
by rolling a ball around it of radius
RADIUS, expand that hull by
EXTRAP, and grid all nodes inside the
expanded hull that are within REACH
of at least one data point
CONCAVE
= Compute the convex hull of the data,
HULL 2
determine concavities in that hull by
rolling a ball around it of radius
RADIUS, expand that hull by
EXTRAP, and grid all nodes inside the
expanded hull that are within REACH
of at least one data point
Note: Concavities in CONCAVE HULL 2 are larger than
the concavities computed using CONCAVE
HULL 1.

R2003.12.0

Process

267

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FLEXTYPE

C*12

NUMPASS

I

FLEXCTRL

C*16

Range Description and Default
Type of grid flexing algorithm to use.
Default Value = BIHARMONIC
Options:
BIHARMONIC

= Biharmonic flexing

LAPLACIAN

= Laplacian flexing

NONE

= No flexing is desired

Maximum number of flexing passes.
If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10
Method for terminating flexing.
Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur NUMPASS
times without regard to CUTOFF.

FLEX<=NUMPASS = Causes flexing to occur a maximum
of NUMPASS times. A grid
curvature change of less than
CUTOFF terminates flexing.

R2003.12.0

CUTOFF

R

Termination criterion for grid flexing.
This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates if the change is less than
CUTOFF, and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Default Value = 0.25

REFINE

I

Number of times to refine the grid between passes of the
flexing filter.Used only if FLEXTYPE is not equal to
NONE.
Each refinement halves the grid increments and
interpolates intermediate grid values. The order of
refining is flex, refine, flex, refine, . . ., flex.
Default Value = 0

MAXCROSS

I

Maximum allowed number of faults that cross the line
drawn between a data point and a grid node in order for
that data point to use for calculating a value at that grid
node.
Default Value = 2

Process

268

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

SMOOTH

R

LINXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in line file.
Default Value = First X field

LINYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in line file.
Default Value = First Y field

LINZFLD

I

Field number of the z field in line file to grid.
Default Value = First Z Value field

LINIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in line file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

FLTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

FLTTFLD

I

Field number of the computed Throw field in the input
center line fault file. There need not be a throw field in the
center line fault file.
Note: If there is a throw and a heave field on the file, then
the heave field is used.
Default Value = First Throw field

FLTAFLD

I

Field number of the computed Dip Angle field in the
input center line fault file. There need not be a dip angle
field in the center line fault file.
Default Value = First Dip Angle field

FLTHFLD

I

Field number for Heave field in fault file.
Note: If there is a throw and heave field on the file, then
the heave field is used.
Default Value = First Heave field

0.0–
1.0

Smoothing modulus is a trade-off between smoothing and
honoring the data during flexing.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original grid,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original grid.
Default Value = 0.5

Process

269

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Line Names
Name

LINE NAMES

Alternate Name L NAMES
Function

This process stores a list of line names in a file for the POST SEISMIC
Process.

Notes

This process does not create a new file when modifying an old file by
adding or deleting names unless specified otherwise by FILEMODE.
To keep the original file you must copy it before you run this process.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

° LINEIN

I

° LINEOUT

C*24

NEWOLD

Range Description and Default

C*24

MFDIN

MFDOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

C*8

Name of existing file for adding or delete line names.
Required if NEWOLD = ADD or DELETE.
Default Value = 0 =
0–5

Number of the MFD for the line file being updated.
Default Value = 0
Name of output line file being created. Required if
NEWOLD = NEW.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output line file.
Default Value = 1
Operation to perform.
Default Value = NEW
Options:
NEW

= Create a new file and put specified line
names on the file.

ADD

= Add specified line names to the end of
input file.

DELETE

= Delete specified line names from
input file. The names are blanked
on the file.

Process

270

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FILEMODE

C*8

Range Description and Default
Mode of handling the input file. Used if NEWOLD =
ADD or DELETE.
Default Value = MODIFY
Options:
MODIFY

= Modify the old file. Do not create a new
output file.

KEEP

= Keep the old version and create a
modified version of the input file.

NUMCHARS

I

1–80

Number of characters in a line name.
The value for this parameter must be equal to the number
of characters in the line names on the seismic data set to
post.
Default Value = 1

NUMLINES

I

0–30

Number of line names specified.
Default Value = 1

LINNAMS

C*80

Array of up to 30 line names to store or delete.
Default Value = Blank

WLDCRDS

C*1

Array of up to 30 wildcards for the line name that is to
add or delete, to use with the corresponding line listed in
LINNAMS.
Set the array element to blank if no wildcard is desired for
a particular line name.
Default Value = Blank

Process

271

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

WLDMTHS

C*8

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 30 options for wildcard substitution to use
with the line names to add or delete.
Default Value = MULTCHAR
Options:
MULTCHAR

= Wildcard can replace multiple
characters. For example, if line
names prefixed by an A were
wanted (A*), then with
WLDCRDS = ′*′, a match would
be found for ′AB′ and ′ABC′.

ONECHAR

= Wildcard can replace only one
character. For example, if line
names prefixed by an A were
wanted (A*), then with WLDCRDS
= ′*′, a match would be found for
′AB′ but not ′ABC′.

Process

272

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Line Resampling
Name

LINE RESAMPLING

Alternate Name RESAMPLE LINE
Function

This process operates on data organized in lines, for example,
2D seismic lines and deviated wells. Its primary task is to create new
points at regular intervals along the lines of a dataset. The interval can
be expressed in terms of distance along the line in some coordinate
system or by the value of an attribute attached to each point. The user
can specify whether the original points are included in the output
dataset. This technique is called resampling.
Once new points are positioned along a line, this process computes
attribute values at the new points with values interpolated or copied
from adjacent points. This technique is called Attribute Propagation.
One typically applies both of these processes to a dataset in sequence;
however, this process allows the user to omit the attribute propagation
process.

Valid Combinations for Fields Required on Input File, by File Type
File Type
Field Type

DATA DATA DATA
2D seis 3D seis other

CNT
R

FAL
T

VER
T

DWE
L

SSE
C

XSE
C

X (EASTING)
or
LONGITUDE

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Y (NORTHING)
or
LATITUDE

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

Req

LINE NAME
or
SEISMIC LINE NUMBER

Req

SHOTPOINT NUMBER
or
SHOTPOINT LOCATION

Req

3D SURVEY NAME

Opt

3D SHOTPOINT NUMBER

Req

SEG I.D.

Req

HORIZON NAME

R2003.12.0

Req
Req

Req

Req

Process

273

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Valid Combinations for PROPMTHS Parameter: By Field Type
Interpolation
Process
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
U
C
I
I
I
I
I
C
I

R2003.12.0

Data
Type Code
Field Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

X (EASTING)
Y (NORTHING)
Z VALUE
DZ/DX
DZ/DY
DZ2/DXDY
X WEIGHT
Y WEIGHT
Z WEIGHT
GRADIENT WEIGHT
Z-VARIATION
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
SHOTPOINT NUMBER
LINEAR DISPLACEMENT
TEXT LOCMOD
TEXT FONT
TEXT SIZE
TEXT ANGLE
CHARACTER TEXT
SYMBOL CODE
LINE NAME
AREA NAME
RESHOT CHARACTER
SEISMIC LINE NUMBER
WELL TRACK NAME
DEVIATED WELL NAME
or
PLATFORM IDENTIFIER
API OR WELL CODE
LOG RUN NUMBER
X-FAULT JOINT
Y-FAULT JOINT
ZL-LEFT SIDE
ZR-RIGHT SIDE
DELTA Z-THROW
SEG I.D.
FAULT BANDWIDTH

Interpolation
Process
I
I
C
C
C
C
I
R
C
C
I
I
C
C
I
I
I
I
U
C
I
I
U
I
C
C
C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
C
U
C

Data
Type Code
Field Name
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75

DIP ANGLE
DIP AZIMUTH ANGLE
VOLUME BASEPLANE
HORIZON NAME
COLOR
LINE NAME ANGLE
SHOTPOINT LOCATION
POINT SEQUENCE NO.
LOG DEPTH TYPE
LOG DEPTH UNITS
GRADS LATITUDE
GRADS LONGITUDE
AREA SYMBOL
AREA IDENTIFICATION
DMS-LATITUDE
DMS-LONGITUDE
HEAVE
STANDARD DEVIATION
DISCONTINUITY CODE
FEATURE CODE
3D LINE IDENTIFIER
3D SHOTPOINT NUMBER
WELL STATUS
SYMBOL ANGLE
LINE STYLE
ROW NUMBER
COLUMN NUMBER
VELOCITY
DEPTH
TIME
THICKNESS
DZ2/DX2
DZ2/DY2
DZ/DS
DZ/DS AZIMUTH
GEOGRAPH RESAMP TECH
3-D SURVEY NAME
DATABASE INDENTIFIER
SYMBOL SIZE

Process

274

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Key for Default Interpolation Processes
C = CLOSEST

Find the nearest valid record and copy the contents of the field to the
output record. This scheme makes use of basis field(s) to compute
the nearest record. Basis fields are simply those field(s) that the
interpolation is based on. Basis fields are either a set of x,y
coordinate fields, or some other single numeric field. If any of the
three records basis field(s) are null, the target value is nulled,
blanked if a textual field.

U = SET TO NULL

Set value of the field to its field null value, blanked if a textual field.

I = INTERPOLATE
Numeric fields

The new value of the field is calculated by interpolating the fields of
the records straddling the output record. This scheme makes use of
basis field(s) to compute the nearest record. If either of the
straddling fields of the interpolation field is null, the target value is
nulled.

Text fields

The target value is copied from either of the straddling records if the
contents of the records are identical. If not identical, the target value
is blanked.

R = RENUMBER

Maintain the proper sequence, with respect to all three records.

Valid Combinationsfor Resampling Method

Input fields each RESINCS resampling method uses, by input file type.
RESINCS values
File Type
DATA
2D Seis

DISTINCXY

DISTINCLL

SHINCREM

NMINCREM

(X,Y)

(Lat,Lon)

Shpt Number
Shpt Location

numeric field

DATA
3D Seis

3D Shpt number
3D Line number

DATA
other

(X,Y)

CNTR

(X,Y)

FALT

(Lat,Lon)

numeric field

(X,Y)

(Lat,Lon)

numeric field

VERT

(X,Y)

(Lat,Lon)

numeric field

DWEL

(X,Y)

(Lat,Lon)

numeric field

SSEC

DISPLACE

X field

XSEC

R2003.12.0

X field

Process

275

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

MFDIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

Name of the input dataset.
Range Options:
Data, contour, fault, vertex, seismic-section,
cross-section and deviated well files
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input dataset.
Default Value = 0

FILEOUT

C*24

Name of the output dataset.

MFDOUT

I

XFLD

I

Field number of the x or longitude coordinates in the input
dataset. Used if RESMTH = DISTINCXY or
DISTINCLL or if file is seismic or cross section. Can also
be used if BREAKDIS 0.0.
Default Value = First x field, if RESMTH = DISTINCXY
or
First longitude field, if RESMTH =
DISTINCLL

YFLD

I

Field number of the y or latitude coordinates in the input
dataset. Used if RESMTH = DISTINCXY or
DISTINCLL. Can also be used if BREAKDIS 0.0.
Default Value = First Y field, if RESMTH =
DISTINCXY
or
First Latitude field, if RESMTH = DISTINCLL

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name or Line Number field in
the input dataset. Used if input file is a 2D seismic
dataset.
Default Value = First Line Name or Line Number field

SHPTFLD

I

Field number of the Shotpoint Number or Shotpoint
Location field in the input dataset. Used if RESMTH =
SHINCREM. Also used if BREAKSPS 0.0.
Default Value = First Shotpoint Number or Shotpoint
Location field found

SURVFLD

I

Field number of the 3D Survey Name field in the input
dataset. Used if input file is a 3D seismic dataset.
Default Value = First 3D Survey Name field found

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output dataset.
Default Value = 1

Process

276

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

SHP3DFLD

I

LN3DFLD

I

SEGIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input dataset.
Used if input file is a deviated well, fault, data or vertex
file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field.

RESNMFLD

I

Field number of a numeric attribute field in the input
dataset. Used if RESMTH = NMINCREM.
Default Value = First Z Value field found

SLCTFLD

I

Field number of the “subsetting” field.
If this field is specified, then only those lines are
processed where the SLCTFLD value of the first point of
the line matches one of the primary masks (SLTXTAS or
SLVALAS). For 3D seismic datasets only those lines are
processed where the SLCTFLD value of the first point in
the survey matches one of the line identification masks.
Default Value = None

RESMTFLD

I

Field number of the geographic coordinate resampling
method field in the input dataset. Used only if
GEORSMTH = FIELD.
Default Value = First geographic coordinate resampling
method field.

PROPBFLD

I

Field number of the basis field for use if RESAMPLE =
NO and PROPAGATE = YES. If zero, coordinates are
used as the basis for propagation.
Default Value = None

Field number of the 3D Shotpoint Number field in the
input dataset. Used if input file is a 3D seismic dataset.
Default Value = First 3D Shotpoint Number field found
Field number of the 3D Line Identifier field in the input
dataset. Used if input file is a 3D seismic dataset.
Default Value = First 3D Line Number field found

Process

277

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SLCTOPER

C*8

Range Description and Default
Comparison operator.
If SLCTFLD is defined, only those lines (surveys, for 3D
seismic DATA) are processed for which the value of field
SLCTFLD satisfies the comparison.
Default Value = EQ
Options:
EQ

= Process the lines equal to SLTXTAS or
SLVALAS

NE

= Process the lines not equal to SLTXTAS or
SLVALAS

LT

= Process the lines less than SLTXTAS or
SLVALAS

LE

= Process the lines less than or equal to
SLTXTAS or SLVALAS

GT

= Process the lines greater than SLTXTAS or
SLVALAS

GE

= Process the lines greater than or equal to
SLTXTAS or SLVALAS

BETWEEN = Process the lines between the interval
bounded by SLTXTAS and SLTXTBS or
SLVALAS and SLVALBS
OUTSIDE

= Process the lines outside the interval
bounded by SLTXTAS and SLTXTBS or
SLVALAS and SLVALBS

NULL

= Process the lines with null values in
SLCTFLD

NOTNULL = Process the lines with non-null values in
SLCTFLD

R2003.12.0

° SLTXTAS

C*80

Array of up to 50 primary text masks for line
identification. Required for all SLCTOPER operations.

° SLTXTBS

C*80

Array of up to 50 secondary text masks for line
identification. Required if SLCTOPER = BETWEEN or
OUTSIDE. Each value must be greater than the
corresponding SLTXTAS value.

° SLVALAS

R

Array of up to 50 primary numeric masks for line
identification. Required for all SLCTOPER operations.

Process

278

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

° SLVALBS

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

R

Array of up to 50 secondary numeric masks for line
identification. Required if SLCTOPER = BETWEEN or
OUTSIDE. Each value must be greater than the
corresponding SLVALAS value.

WLDMULTI C*1

Wildcard character that matches zero or more characters.
Used to specify line identification masks.
Default Value = * (asterisk character)

WLDSINGL

C*1

Wildcard character that matches exactly one character.
Used to specify line identification masks.
Default Value = % (percent sign)

RESAMPLE

C*4

Resampling indicator.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Perform resampling step

NO

= Omit resampling step

Process

279

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

RESMTH

C*12

Range Description and Default
Resampling method. The method specified must be valid
for the dataset type being resampled. Applied globally to
all lines.
Default Value =
FILEIN

RESMTH

2D seismic

SHINCREM

3D seismic

SHINCREM

DWEL

DISTINCXY

CNTR

DISTINCXY

FALT

DISTINCXY

VERT

DISTINCXY

SSEC

SHINCREM

XSEC

DISPLACE

other DATA

DISTINCXY

Options:

R2003.12.0

DISTINCXY

= Resample on rectangular coordinates
by the Distance Increment Method.

DISTINCLL

= Resample on geographic coordinates
by the Distance Increment Method.

SHINCREM

= Resample by the Shotpoint Increment
Method.

NMINCREM

= Resample by the Numerical Increment
Method.

DISPLACE

= Resample by the Displacement
Method.

Process

280

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

RESINCS

R

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 50 values for the resampling increment or
distance between successive new points on a line.
For
RESMTH

DISTINCXY

value is rectangular
distance

DISTINCLL

value is distance along
an arc

SHINCREM

value is shotpoint
increment

NMINCREM

value is numerical
increment

DISPLACE

value is distance along
the baseline

Default Value = 1.0, for RESMTH = SHINCREM
or
None, otherwise
RESBASES

RETAIN

R2003.12.0

R

C*12

Array of up to 50 values for the base value for RESMTH
= SHINCREM, NMINCREM, or DISPLACE.
Default Value = 0.0
Which original records to keep during the resampling
process. Applied globally to all lines.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= Line contains newly created points plus
all the points from the original line

ENDPOINTS

= Line contain newly created points plus
the endpoints from the original line

Process

281

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

GEORSMTH C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Resampling coordinate method. Used if RESMTH =
DISTINCLL for geographic coordinates. Applied
globally to all lines.
Default Value = GC
Options:
GC

= Great Circle

RL

= Rhumb Line

NA

= No preference (use default)

FIELD

= Use resampling coordinate method field
specified by RESMTFLD

TDRESDIV

R

If the secondary sort field (line identifier) is not divisible
by this value, the line is not resampled. Used for 3D
seismic dataset that contains a 3D Survey Name Field
only.
Default Value = 1.0

RESTOLER

R

Tolerance for resampled point closeness. A resampled
point is discarded if it is within RESTOLER distance
from any original point.
This check applies only to the endpoints if RETAIN =
ENDPOINTS, applies globally to all lines and is not used
if set to zero.
If RESMTH = DISTINCLL, this value is assumed to be in
the units of ARCUNITS and applies only to lines passing
the subsetting criteria (see SLCTOPER and associated
parameters).
Default Value = 0.0

Process

282

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

BREAKDIS

R

Array of up to 50 break x,y or arc values. If the distance
between any adjacent points on the line is greater than the
break value, then no resampling occurs between these two
points. A break value of zero disables distance break
checking. Used for 2D seismic DATA, FALT, VERT,
CNTR, and DWEL files.
If RESMTH = DISTINCXY, BREAKDIS is assumed to
be in rectangular units.
If RESMTH = DISTINCLL, BREAKDIS is assumed to
be arc distance in units specified by ARCUNITS.
The following rules apply if RESMTH = SHINCREM,
DISPLACE, or NMINCREM and XFLD and YFLD are
specified by the user.
1. If XFLD and YFLD point to rectangular coordinate
fields, BREAKDIS is assumed to be in rectangular
units.
2. If XFLD and YFLD point to geographic coordinate
fields, BREAKDIS is assumed to be arc distance in
units specified by ARCUNITS.
If XFLD and YFLD are not specified by the user and the
file contains rectangular coordinate fields, BREAKDIS is
assumed to be in rectangular units.
If the file contains only geographic coordinate fields,
BREAKDIS is assumed to be arc distance in units
specified by ARCUNITS.
Default Value = 0.0, no break checking

BREAKSPS

R

Array of up to 50 break shotpoint values. If the distance
between any adjacent shotpoints on the line is greater than
the break value, then no resampling occurs between these
two points. A break value of zero disables shotpoint break
checking. Used for both 2D and 3D seismic lines.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

283

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

RESDSCS

C*8

Range Description and Default
Use of discontinuity fields during the resampling process.
Applied globally to all lines.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
IGNORE = Ignore discontinuity field during the
resampling process.

ELLPSMTH

R2003.12.0

C*12

SOME

= Preserve any point for which any of the
propagation discontinuity fields (DISCONTS)
is positive. This allows selective overriding of
RETAIN = ENDPOINTS.

ALL

= Preserve any point for which any of the
discontinuity fields in the dataset is positive.
This allows selective overriding of RETAIN =
ENDPOINTS.

Method for defining ellipsoid parameters. Used if
RESMTH = DISTINCLL for geographic coordinates.
Default Value = FILE
Options:
FILE

= Parameters are obtained from the
history records of input file.

PROJECTION

= Parameters are obtained from the
currently defined projection.

ELLIPSD

= Parameters are defined by naming the
ellipsoid using the ELLIPSD
parameter.

SPECIFIED

= Parameters are specified in the
SEMIMAJR and SEMIMINR
parameters.

Process

284

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ELLIPSD

C*20

Range Description and Default
Name of the reference ellipsoid.
Default Value = CLARKE 1866
Options:
AIRY 1858
AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL
BESSEL 1841
CLARKE 1858
CLARKE 1866
CLARKE 1880
EVEREST 1830
FISCHER 1960
FISCHER 1968
GHANA NATIONAL
GRS-80
HAYFORD 1909
HELMERT
HOUGH 1956
INTERNATIONAL
IUGG 1967
IUGG 1975
KAULA 1961
KRASSOVSKY 1940
MALAYAN EVEREST 1830
MERCURY
MERCURY MODIFIED
SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
WGS-72 1972
WGS-84

SEMIMAJR

R

Semimajor axis A for user-defined ellipsoids.
Default Value = 1.0

SEMIMINR

R

Semiminor axis B for user-defined ellipsoids.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

285

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

AXSUNITS

C*20

Range Description and Default
Units to use for the SEMIMAJR and SEMIMINR
parameters.
Default Value = METERS
Options:
FILE

= Units from projection information
about input file

USER
SUPPLIED

= User-supplied using AXSFACTR

METERS
INTERNATIONAL FEET
US SURVEY FEET
YARDS
INCHES
KILOMETERS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES

AXSFACTR

R2003.12.0

R

Units factor in units per meter if AXSUNITS = USER
SUPPLIED.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

286

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ARCUNITS

C*20

Range Description and Default
Units to use for the arc distances. Used if BREAKDIS,
RESINCS, or RESTOLER is an arc value.
Default Value = FILE
Options:
FILE

= Units from projection information
about input file

USER
SUPPLIED

= User-supplied using ARCFACTR

METERS
INTERNATIONAL FEET
US SURVEY FEET
YARDS
INCHES
KILOMETERS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES

ARCFACTR

R

PROPAGAT C*3

R2003.12.0

Units factor, units per meter. Used if ARCUNITS =
USER SUPPLIED.
Default Value = 1.0
Attribute propagation indicator.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Perform attribute propagation

NO

= Omit attribute propagation

Process

287

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FILLFALT

C*4

Whether to propagate attributes inside faults. Used only if
FILLFLDS is used. Applied globally to all lines.
Default Value = NO
Options:
NO

= Ignore discontinuity fields

YES

= Use discontinuity fields to prevent interpolating
through faults; requires DISCONTS and
FILLFLDS

FILLFLDS

I

Array of up to 50 fields in the input dataset to propagate.
Used if FILLFALT = YES.
Default Value = None, all fields are filled if no fields are
specified, even if there are greater than 50 fields
to fill

DISCONTS

I

Array of up to 50 discontinuity flag fields to use during
the propagation step, listed in the same position as the
corresponding field in FILLFLDS. Used if FILLFALT =
YES.
If n FILLFLDS are specified, then n DISCONTS fields
must be specified. A value of zero for the nth DISCONTS
field implies that the nth FILLFLDS field has no
associated discontinuity field.
Default Value = 0

PROPMTHS C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Array of up to 50 methods used to specify whether the
null value is interpolated or copied from surrounding
records, for each field being propagated, listed in the
same position as the corresponding field in FILLFLDS. If
more than 50 fields are being propagated, LNRS uses the
default methods for the remaining fields. Used only if
FILLFLDS is used.
Default Value = Field dependent, see “Valid
Combinations” on page 275
Options:
INTERP

= Interpolate from surrounding values

PRIOR

= Copy from previous record

POST

= Copy from next record

CLOSEST

= Copy from closest record

DEFAULT

= Use the default

Process

288

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

List CPS Files
Name

LIST CPS FILES

Alternate Name CPS FILE LIST
Function

This process lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• CPSFILE
DISKUNIT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*80
I

Name of the CPS SAVE file.
0–99

FORTRAN logical unit on which to open the CPS SAVE
file.
Default Value = 11

Process

289

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Loop
Name

LOOP

Alternate Name
Function

The LOOP and LOOP END Processes provide “do-loop” type
capabilities to execute a set of processes several times with changing
data. The LOOP Process is executed as the first of a set of processes to
repeat. (The set of processes are those between LOOP and LOOP
END.) The first and last value of the loop index are parameters to
LOOP.
The parameters that vary from one execution to the next in the loop get
their values from the DATA BLOCK Process. Using the DATA
BLOCK Process, a string of values, one for each pass through the loop,
are entered as parameters. The value types can be INTEGER, REAL,
or TEXT. The DATA BLOCK Use Number distinguishes one set of
DATA BLOCK values from the next if several sets are used in a loop.

Notes

Loops cannot be nested. For more examples and discussion of the
LOOP and DATA BLOCK Processes, see “Additional Information”
on page 17.
To reference files or pictures after the LOOP END statement that are
created in the second or subsequent loop iteration, it is necessary to
execute the loop before the reference, that is, add the E Process after
the LOOP END Process.

R2003.12.0

Process

290

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Example
C
C
This is a test of data, loops, initialization, and PGRD
C
C
The output grid names
C
DATA BLOCK:01,00
HOWMANY = 2, DATATYPE = ’TEXT’, DATASIZE = 24,
VALUE4 = ’OUTGRID1 VAB’, ’OUTGRID2 VAB’
/
C
C
The gridding intervals
C
DATA BLOCK:02,00
HOWMANY = 2, DATATYPE = ’REAL’, DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 400, 500 /
C
C
The amounts of refinement
C
DATA BLOCK:03,00
HOWMANY = 2, DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’, DATASIZE =
1,
VALUE = 1, 2 /
C
C
Open the master file for the data and output grids
C
MFDS:01,00
NUMMFDS = 1,
MFD1 = ’DUA1:[GDP.ZCL.TEST]ZCL.MFD’ /
C
C
Now we will start the LOOP going two passes
C
LOOP:01,00
FIRST = 1, LAST = 2 /
C
POINT GRIDDING:01,00 DATAIN = ’TRIDATA’,
INFLD = 3,
REPORT = 2,
GRIDOUT = #01, MFDOUT = 1,
XINC = #02,
REFINE = #03 /
LOOP END:01,00 /
C
C
Now we will execute the LOOP
C
The processing is done. Terminate the run
C
STOP:01,00 /

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• FIRST

I

Initial value of the “do-loop” index. The number of loop
iterations is LAST – FIRST + 1.

• LAST

I

Final value of the “do-loop” index. The number of loop
iterations is LAST – FIRST + 1.

Process

291

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Loop End
Name

LOOP END

Alternate Name L END
Function

The LOOP and LOOP END processes provide “do-loop” capabilities
to execute a set of processes several times with changing data. The
LOOP Process is executed as the first of a set of repeated processes.
LOOP END signals the end of the set of repeated processes.
See the LOOP Process for a more detailed discussion of looping.

R2003.12.0

Example

LOOP END:

Parameters

No Parameters

/

Process

292

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Macro End
Name

MACRO END

Alternate Name

R2003.12.0

Function

This process has no parameters; its only use is to terminate a Macro
sequence. See the examples and explanation in “Appendix H. Macros”
in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.

Parameters

No Parameters

Process

293

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Make MFD
Name

MAKE MFD

Alternate Name MAKE
Function

This process creates a new, empty MFD, which then can be attached
using the MFDS Process.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• MFDNAME

C*80

Disk file name of the new MFD.
This parameter is not used on systems without dynamic
file allocation; on those systems, the file name is specified
with Job Control Language.

HEADER

C*24

Internally stored MFD name without directory path is
used for file lists.
Default Value = First 24 characters of MFDNAME, not
including directory path specification

Process

294

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Merge
Name

MERGE

Alternate Name MERG
Function

This process performs concatenation, union, intersection, and
exception merging of member files in an MFD.

Notes

For two files to be merged, either the merge keys are specified, in
which case sort flags are not used, or the merge keys are not specified,
in which case the files should be sorted and the sort field names must
match. For a discussion of sort fields refer to the SORT Process.
It is recommended that the input files be sorted by the PRIMKEYS and
SECDKEYS fields before you input them to the MERGE Process.
However, it is possible that data is presorted and that sorting would be
an inefficient use of resources. In these cases, knowledge of the
ordering of the input data can be used in conjunction with the process
parameters to allow multiple file management without the sorting
overhead.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DATAIN1

C*24

MFDIN1

I

• DATAIN2

C*24

MFDIN2

I

Range Description and Default
Name of primary input file. This file must be sorted.
0–5

Name of secondary input file. This file must be sorted.
0–5

DATAOUT1 C*24
MFDOUT1

R2003.12.0

I

Number of the MFD that contains the first input data file.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD that contains the second input data
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of merged output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output merged data
file.
Default Value = 1

Process

295

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MERGTYPE C*16

Range Description and Default
Type of merge to perform.
For matching primary sort field data, values from
DATAIN2 overrides values from DATAIN1.
If the value from DATAIN2 is a ZNON, the value from
DATAIN1 is placed into DATAOUT1.
Default Value = CONCATENATION
Options:
CONCATENATION = If merge keys are not specified,
DATAOUT1 contains the
contents of DATAIN1 with the
contents of DATAIN2 appended
at the end. If merge keys are
specified, an interleaved
concatenation is performed.

R2003.12.0

UNION

= If merge keys are not specified, a
simple one-to-one union is
performed. DATAOUT1 contains
all the data unique to DATAIN1,
all data unique to DATAIN2 and
the data from DATAIN2 that
have matching primary sort field
values with DATAIN1. If merge
keys are specified, a more
complex one-to-many union is
performed.

INTERSECTION

= DATAOUT1 contains only the
data from DATAIN2 that has
matching primary sort field
values with DATAIN1.

EXCEPTION

= DATAOUT1 contains the same
results as that of
INTERSECTION. DATAOUT2
contains the data that do not meet
the INTERSECTION criteria.

Process

296

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

KEYORDRS C*10

Array of up to 10 sort order indicators, corresponding in
position to the fields listed in PRIMKEYS and
SECDKEYS. An entry in the nth position indicates that
sort order is to be applied to the field in the nth position in
PRIMKEYS and SECDKEYS.
If multiple key fields are used, a combination of sort
orders is allowed (e.g., KEYORDRS
=′ASCENDING′,′DESCENDING′).
Default Value = ASCENDING
Options:
ASCENDING

= Process by ascending field value order

DESCENDING = Process by descending field value order

PRIMKEYS

I

SECDKEYS

I

An array of up to 10 field numbers to use as merge key
fields for the primary input file. If they are used, they
override any sort flags found on the file.
Default Value = None, sort flags from the input files are
used
An array of up to 10 field numbers to use as merge key
fields for the secondary input file. If SECDKEYS is used,
PRIMKEYS is specified. Key field type must match the
type of field in the corresponding position in
PRIMKEYS. If an entry has a value of zero, it takes on
the same value as the corresponding entry in PRIMKEYS.
Default Value = None, sort flags from the input files are
used

DATAOUT2 C*24
MFDOUT2

R2003.12.0

I

Name of output exception file. Used if MERGTYPE =
EXCEPTION.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output exception data
file. Used if MERGTYPE = EXCEPTION.
Default Value = 1

Process

297

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

MFDS
Name

MFDS

Alternate Name
Function

This process is used to attach MFDs to your ZCL run. You can attach
up to four MFDs. The last MFD attached is the scratch MFD and is
attached automatically.
If MFDs are referenced from other processes, the sequential position of
that MFD in the parameters described below is used. For example,
MFD2 would be MFD number 2.
To reference the scratch MFD in other processes, use either 0 (the
default in most cases, and the position of the scratch file if NUMMFDS
= 0) or N+1 where N is the number of MFDs attached. The Scratch
MFD is initialized (cleaned out) when the MFDS Process is specified.

Notes

This process must be called before you can write to any master or
scratch file. Since neglecting to call MFDs is not a syntactical error,
ZCL gives no error report during debugging; however, the ZCL run is
not productive.
Attach MFDs sequentially (MFD1, MFD2, MFD3, MFD4). Do not
leave any blank—for example, do not use MFD3 unless you specify
MFD1 and MFD2.
Warning
This process is only called once within a ZCL command stream. If it is
called more than once, erroneous results may occur.

R2003.12.0

Process

298

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

NUMMFDS

I

Range Description and Default
0–4

Number of MFDs to attach.
If this parameter is not specified and the default is taken,
then any MFDs specified are ignored.
Default Value = 0

MFD1

C*80

Name of the first MFD to attach.
Default Value = Blank

MFD2

C*80

Name of the second MFD to attach.
Default Value = Blank

MFD3

C*80

Name of the third MFD to attach.
Default Value = Blank

MFD4

C*80

Name of the fourth MFD to attach.
Default Value = Blank

Process

299

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Mistie Reduction
Name

MISTIE REDUCTION

Alternate Name MISTIE
Function

This process detects, reports and reduces line-crossing misties on an
input file of seismic line data. It produces an output file of reduced
misties, an optional report file and an optional plot file.
Selected seismic lines (specified by line name) can be held fixed.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• LINEIN
MFDIN

I
C*24

MFDMTIE

I

Name of the input file of line oriented data. This data file
must contain a Line Name field.
0–5

I

HEADER

C*12

C*24

Number of the MFD that contains the input line data.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output plot file to contain line names,
shotpoint numbers, and other Mistie information intended
for plotting.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

C*24

MFDREPT

LINEOUT

Range Description and Default

C*24

MTIEOUT

REPORT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Number of the MFD to contain the output plot file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output report file to contain line names,
shotpoint numbers, and other Mistie information intended
for printout.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output report file.
Default Value = 1
Display of the header information, such as date and time
of creation.
Default Value = NO DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY

= Display file header information about screen

NO
DISPLAY

= Do not display file header information.

Name of the output file of reduced Misties. This
duplicates data in the input file except with reduced
Misties.
Default Value = Blank

Process

300

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDOUT

I

LINXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the input line file.
Default Value = First X field

LINYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the input line file.
Default Value = First Y field

LINZFLD

I

Field number of the z field in the input line file.
Default Value = First Z Value field

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field in the input line file.
Default Value = First Line Name field

SHIFT

LNAMEIN

0–5

C*8

Number of the MFD to contain output reduced Mistie file.
Default Value = 1

The z fields to shift. Not used if LINEOUT is blank.
Default Value = ONLY
Options:

C*24

ONLY

= Only shift the z field specified in
LINZFLD

SMALLER

= Shift z fields smaller than LINZFLD z
field

LARGER

= Shift z fields larger than LINZFLD z field

ALL

= Shift all z fields

Name of the text file that contains the line names of those
seismic lines to be held fixed by the MISTIE Process.
If neither LNAMEIN nor LNAMES are specified, no
lines are considered fixed. (All lines would be free to be
moved.)
Default Value = Blank

MFDLNAME

I

LNAMEFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field of the LNAMEIN
file. If LNAMEIN is not blank and LNAMEFLD is zero,
then the first Line Name field is used.
Default Value = 0

C*20

Array of up to 10 names of those seismic lines to be held
fixed.
Default Value = Blank

LNAMES

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

0–5

Number of MFD that contains the input line names text
file of those seismic lines that are to be held fixed.
Default Value = 0

Process

301

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Multiple Grid Ops
Name

MULTIPLE GRID OPS

Alternate Name MULT GRID OPS
Function

This process takes as input an array of grids and performs a single
operation on the array. The first pair of grids are processed with DUAL
GRID OPS, then the results are processed with Grid3 to produce a new
grid, the results of which are then processed with Grid4, etc.

Example
Initial
Input

Intermediate Results
with Initial Grids

Final
Results

Grid1
Grid2

Result1
Grid3

Result2
Grid4

Result3
•••

•••
GridN–1

ResultN
–2

GridN

ResultN
–1

Key:
Grid
= Existing Grid used by the process
Result = Grid created by this process

R2003.12.0

Process

302

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

ZNON

R

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 40 grid names. A minimum of two grid
names is required.
0–5

Array of up to 40 numbers for the MFDs that contain the
input grid files, in the same position as the corresponding
grid in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1
Null data value for the output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

Process

303

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME

Data
Type
C*8

Range Description and Default
Grid operation to perform.
Options:
ADD

= Add two input grids.

SUBTRACT

= Subtract GRIDIN2 from GRIDIN1.

MULTIPLY

= Multiply GRIDIN1 by GRIDIN2 (grid
node by grid node, not matrix
multiplication).

DIVIDE

= Divide GRIDIN1 by GRIDIN2 (grid node
by grid node).

MAXIMUM

= Take the maximum of two grids (grid
node by grid node). ZNON is output if
either node is ZNON.

MINIMUM

= Take the minimum of two grids (grid
node by grid node). ZNON is output if
either node is ZNON.

OR

= Perform logical OR operation.

AND

= Perform logical AND operation.

CMPLMENT = Perform logical COMPLEMENT
operation.
CLIPMAX

= Clip values of GRIDIN1 to GRIDIN2 if
GRIDIN1 exceeds GRIDIN2.

CLIPMIN

= Clip values of GRIDIN1 to GRIDIN2 if
GRIDIN1 is less than GRIDIN2.

BLANKMAX = Blank values of GRIDIN1 if GRIDIN1
exceeds GRIDIN2.

R2003.12.0

BLANKMIN

= Blank values of GRIDIN1 if GRIDIN1 is
less than GRIDIN2.

MERGEHI

= Take the maximum of two grids. If only
one grid is defined at some node, set the
output grid node to the value that is
defined.

MERGELO

= Take the minimum of two grids. If only
one grid is defined at some node, set the
output grid node to the value that is
defined.

Process

304

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

Index
ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1
A
arrays 21-36
array names 23-36
corresponding arrays 22
entering array elements 21
B
BACK INTERPOLATE 43-44
back reference
back reference number 6
BASEMAP DETAIL 45-46
BDR FILL 52
BIFURCATE BALANCE 162-163
BK IN 43-44
BLANK DATA 47-48
BLANK GRID 49-50
BORDER 51
BORDER FILL 52
BRANCH 53-54
BRDR 51
C
C 55
CELL CALCULATE 66-67
CGM FILE 56-57
CHANGE DATA BLOCK 112-115
CLR TBL 65
CNTR 68-73
CNTR CELL TABLE 74-77
color index
referenced by a process 40
COLOR POLY 64
COLOR POLYGONS 64
COLOR TABLE 65
COLORBAR 58-63
COLORSCALE 58-63

R2003.12.0

command stream 4-10
example 8-10
comments
in command stream 55
COMPUTE CELL VALUE 66-67
CONNCT GEOGRAPHIC 202-209
CONTOUR 68-73
CONTOUR CELL TABLE 74-77
CONTOUR GRIDDING 78-84
CONTOUR NEW 85-95
conventions
in this manual 2
process descriptions 37-39
CONVERT DATA 183-186
CONVERT LAT TO CELL 250
converting units 17
“nice”centimeters 18
COPY 96-97
COPY PICTURE 96-97
COUNT DATA 116
CPS EXPORT 159-160
CPS FILE LIST 289
CPS IMPORT 230-232
CROSS SECTION 98-101
CROSS SECTION NEW 102-104
CTOG 78-84

Index

305

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

D

E

D 105
D WEL POST 122-131
DA BK 47-48
DATA 106-110
DATA BLOCK 106-110
using 18-20
DATA BLOCK PRINT 111
DATA BLOCK UTILITY 112-115
DATA DATA TO DATA 142-144
DATA ENUMERATION 116
DATA STATISTICS 117-119
DATA STATS 117-119
DB PRINT 111
debugging 14
common errors found 16
see also D, ECHO
default value
in command stream 39
DEL F 120
DELETE FILE 120
DELETE PICTURE 121
DEV WELL POST 122-131
DIP SYMBOL 132-133
DIP SYMBOLIZATION 132-133
DIP VECTOR PLOT 134-137
DISP 138-139
DISPLAY 138-139
DMS DEG 140-141
DMS TO FROM DEG 140-141
DUAL DATA OPS 142-144
DUAL GRID OPS 145-148

E 149
ECHO 150
EQUITY 151-154
EQUITY REPORT 151-154
error check, see debugging
EVAL 155-156
EVALUATE 155-156
EXPORT 157-158
EXPORT CPS FILE 159-160
EXPORT ZGF FILE 161
EXPT 157-158

R2003.12.0

F
FAULT BALANCER 162-163
FAULT LOCATOR 164-165
FAULT LOCATOR NEW 166-170
FAULT MIGR 171-173
FAULT MIGRATION 171-173
FAULT PROF 174-175
FAULT PROFILING 174-175
FAULT SHRINKER 176-180
FAULT TRANSFORM 181-182
FILE CONVERSION 183-186
FILE HISTORY 187
FILE INFO 188
FILE LISTING 189-190
FILE STATISTICS 191-193
FILE STATS 191-193
FILE UTIL 194-196
FILE UTILITY 194-196
FILTER 197-199
FISHNET PICTURE 234
FISHNET PLOT 235-239
FLEXING 197-199
FLOC 164-165
FLOC NEW 166-170
FLT D SYMB C 200-201
FLT DIP SYMB CENTER 200-201

Index

306

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

G

L

G TO D 221
GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT 202-209
GEOGRAPHIC SORT 210-211
GR BK 49-50
GRAD VECTOR PLOT 134-137
GRAPHICS FILE 212
GRID GRID TO GRID 145-148
GRID LISTING 213-215
GRID RESAMPLING 216-217
GRID STATISTICS 218-220
GRID STATS 218-220
GRID TO DATA 221

L END 292
L GRID 255-260, 261-269
L NAMES 270-272
LAB L 240-243
LAB N 244-247
LAB X 248-249
LABEL LAT/LONG 240-243
LABEL N/E 244-247
LABEL XSEC 248-249
LATTICE TO CELL 250
LGB DEFAULTS 251-252
LGBDEF 251-252
LINE GEN 253-254
LINE GENERALIZE 253-254
LINE GRIDDING 255-260, 261-269
LINE NAMES 270-272
LINE RESAMPLING 273-288
LIST CPS FILES 289
LIST FILE 189-190
LIST GRID 213-215
log file 13
LOOP 290-291
using 20
LOOP END 292

H
H CPY 224-225
HAND CONTOUR PNTS 222-223
HARDCOPY 224-225
HIST 187
HORIZON PENETRATE 226-228
I
IF 53-54
IMPORT 229
IMPORT CPS FILE 230-232
IMPORT ZGF FILE 233
IMPT 229
ISOMETRIC PICTURE 234
ISOMETRIC PLOT 235-239

R2003.12.0

M
MACRO END 293
MAKE 294
MAKE BDF 45-46
MAKE MFD 294
MERG 295-297
MERGE 295-297
MFDS 298-299
MISTIE 300-301
MISTIE REDUCTION 300-301
MULT GRID OPS 302-304
MULTIPLE GRID OPS 302-304

Index

307

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 1

O

T

OPEN ZGF 212
output file name
default based on input field name 21
default based on input file name 20

TRANSFORM FAULTS 181-182

P
PC DL 121
PENETRATE HORIZON 226-228
process identifier 5
process statement 5-7
arrays 7
end process symbol 7
parameters 6-7
parameter name 6
parameter value 6
process identifier 5
back reference number 6
process name 5
use number 5
PROFILE CONTOUR 85-95

U
use number 5
X
XSEC 98-101
XSEC NEW 102-104
Z
ZGF EXPORT 161
ZGF IMPORT 233

R
RESAMPLE GRID 216-217
RESAMPLE LINE 273-288
running ZCL
in background 13
in foreground 11-12
S
SCALE PLOT 56-57
SEIS SPECIAL PTS 222-223
SHRINK 176-180
SORT GEOGRAPHIC 210-211
spaces
in process names, parameters, and options
40

R2003.12.0

Index

308